P40 MCR Sas Ug en 6

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 202

GE

Grid Solutions

MiCOM S1 Agile

User Guide
MiCOM IED Support Software

Software version: 3.0


Publication Reference: P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6
Contents
1 Introduction 3
2 User Interface 4
2.1 Tile Structure 4
2.2 Menu Structure 5
3 Getting Started 6
3.1 Quick System Guide 7
3.2 Download Data Models 7
3.3 Set Up a System 7
3.4 Connect to an IED 7
3.5 Connect to an IED in a System 7
3.6 Send Settings to a Device 7
3.7 Extract Settings From a Device 8
3.8 Compare Settings Files 8
3.9 Extract a DNP3 File From a Device 8
3.10 Extract an Events File From a Device 8
3.11 Extract a Disturbance Record From a Device 8
4 Cyber Security 9
4.1 Overview 9
4.2 The Need for Cyber-Security 9
4.3 Standards 10
4.3.1 NERC Compliance 10
4.3.2 IEEE 1686-2013 12
4.4 Cyber-Security Implementation 13
4.4.1 Initial Setup 13
4.5 Roles and Permissions 14
4.5.1 Roles 14
4.5.2 Permissions 15
4.6 Authentication 17
4.6.1 Authentication Methods 17
4.6.2 Bypass 17
4.6.3 Login 18
4.6.4 User Sessions 19
4.6.5 User Locking Policy 20
4.6.6 Logout 21
4.6.7 Device Users 22
4.6.8 Password Policy 22
4.6.9 Change Password 22
4.6.10 RADIUS 22
4.6.11 Recovery 24
4.6.12 Disabling Physical Ports 26
4.6.13 Disabling Logical Ports 27
4.7 Security Event Management 27
4.7.1 Security Events: Courier 27
4.7.2 Syslog 29
4.7.3 Syslog Client 30
4.7.4 Syslog Functionality 30
5 PSL Editor 33
5.1 Loading Schemes from Files 33
5.2 PSL Editor Toolbar 33
5.2.1 Logic Symbols 33
5.3 Logic Signal Properties 34
5.3.1 Link Properties 35
5.3.2 Opto Signal Properties 35
5.3.3 Input Signal Properties 35
5.3.4 Output Signal Properties 35
5.3.5 GOOSE Input Signal Properties 35
Contents S1 Agile

5.3.6 GOOSE Output Signal Properties 36


5.3.7 Control Input Signal Properties 36
5.3.8 InterMiCOM Input Properties 36
5.3.9 InterMiCOM Output Properties 36
5.3.10 Function Key Properties 37
5.3.11 Fault Recorder Trigger Properties 37
5.3.12 LED Signal Properties 37
5.3.13 Contact Signal Properties 37
5.3.14 LED Conditioner Properties 37
5.3.15 Contact Conditioner Properties 38
5.3.16 Counter Properties 38
5.3.17 Timer Properties 38
5.3.18 Gate Properties 39
5.3.19 Off-Page Connector Properties 39
5.3.20 SR Programmable Gate Properties 44
5.4 PSL Converter 45
5.4.1 PSL Converter Prerequisites 45
5.4.2 File Conversion 45
5.5 DDB Monitoring 45
5.5.1 DDB Monitoring Prerequisites 45
5.5.2 Setting the DDB Monitoring Session 46
5.5.3 Saving the DDB Monitoring Session 46
5.5.4 Playing the DDB Monitoring Session 46
5.6 Viewing and Printing PSL Diagrams 46
6 SLD Editor 48
6.1 SLD Editor Implementation 48
6.2 SLD Editor Symbols 48
7 IED Configurator 53
7.1 IED Configurator Tool Features 53
7.2 IEC 61850 Substation Configuration Languages 53
7.3 IEC 61850 Substation Configuration Files 54
7.4 Opening a Preconfigured SCL File 55
7.5 Opening An ICD Template File 55
7.5.1 Template Installed for Required IED Type 56
7.5.2 Template Not Installed for Required IED Type 56
7.6 Opening an Existing MCL Configuration File 56
7.7 Configuring a MiCOM IED 56
7.7.1 Reading or Editing IED Details 57
7.7.2 Communications Setup 58
7.7.3 Editing Communications Settings 59
7.7.4 Ethernet Failover Settings 60
7.7.5 Configuring the IED for SNTP 60
7.7.6 Configuring the SNTP Server 61
7.7.7 Editing Dataset Definitions 62
7.7.8 Configuring Optimised Performance Goose Datasets 63
7.7.9 GOOSE Publishing Configuration 64
7.7.10 GOOSE Subscription Configuration 65
7.7.11 Report Control Block Configuration 67
7.7.12 Controls Configuration 68
7.7.13 Editing Configurable Data Attributes 69
7.7.14 Editing Measurement Configurations 69
7.8 Full Validation of IED Configuration 71
7.9 Validation Summary 71
7.10 Managing SCL Schema Versions 72
7.10.1 Adding and Removing SCL Schemas 72
7.11 Configuration Banks 72
7.12 Transfer of Configurations 73
7.13 Exporting Installed ICD Template files 73

ii P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6
S1 Agile Contents

7.14 Exporting Configured SCL Files 73


7.15 Exporting Logical Device and Node Models to a Document 74
7.16 Managing Logical Devices and Nodes 74
7.16.1 Editing Logical Devices and Nodes 74
7.16.2 Configuring Logical Devices 74
7.16.3 Configuring Logical Nodes 75
8 DNP3 Configurator 77
8.1 Preparing Files Offline to Send to an IED 77
8.2 Send Settings to an IED 77
8.3 Extract Settings From an IED 77
8.4 View IED Settings 78
9 Curve Tool 79
9.1 Features 79
9.2 Curve Plot Pane 79
9.2.1 Open a Curve 79
9.2.2 Zooming and Panning 79
9.2.3 Change the Graph to Default Size 80
9.2.4 Change the Graph Grid Lines 80
9.2.5 Change the Graph Scale 80
9.2.6 Change Curve Colours 80
9.2.7 Print a Curve 80
9.2.8 Save a Curve as an Image 80
9.3 Curve Points Details Pane 80
9.3.1 Create a New Curve 81
9.3.2 Entering Values of Q and T into the Table 81
9.3.3 Edit a Curve 81
9.3.4 Interpolating Curve Points 82
9.3.5 Import Curve Points 82
9.3.6 Export Curve Points 82
9.4 Formula Editor 82
9.4.1 Pick-Up Setting and TMS 83
9.5 Curve Templates 83
9.5.1 Select a Curve Template 85
9.6 Connecting to an IED 85
9.6.1 Connecting to a Serial Port 85
9.6.2 Connecting to the Ethernet Port 86
9.7 Send a Curve to an IED 86
9.8 Extract a Curve from an IED 86
10 S&R Courier 87
10.1 Set Up IED Communication 87
10.2 Create a New Communication Setup 87
10.3 Open a Connection 87
10.4 Create a New or Default IED DNP 3.0 File 88
10.5 Extract a Settings File From a Device 88
10.6 Save a Settings File 88
10.7 Send a Settings File to a Device 88
11 Monitoring Module 89
11.1 Offline and Online Monitoring Module 89
11.2 Online Monitoring Module 89
12 GOOSE Editor 91
12.1 Set Up IED Communication 91
12.2 Create a New Communication Setup 91
12.3 Open a Connection 91
12.4 Scan for Available Devices 91
12.5 Extract GOOSE Settings From a Device 92
12.6 Open, Edit and Save a GOOSE File 92
12.7 Send GOOSE Settings to a Device 92

P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6 iii
Contents S1 Agile

13 GOOSE Configurator 93
13.1 Open an MCL File 93
13.2 Export From An S1 System To GOOSE Configurator 93
13.3 Publish a Message 93
13.4 Show Published Messages 93
13.5 Clone Publishing 94
13.6 Subscribe to a Message 94
13.7 Set A PSL File Path 94
13.8 Open A PSL File Path 94
13.9 Manage GOOSE Connections 94
13.10 Show IED Details 94
13.11 Working with SCL Files 94
13.12 Save Changes 95
13.13 Restore MCL Files 95
13.14 Currently Opened Files 95
13.15 Recently Used Files 95
13.16 Close Files 95
13.17 Application Note 95
13.17.1 Configuring the IED 96
13.17.2 Exporting a Preconfigured System to GOOSE Configurator 98
13.17.3 Adding a New IED to the Goose Configurator 99
13.17.4 Creating a New GOOSE Publication 100
13.17.5 GOOSE Subscription 101
13.17.6 Cloning of a Publisher 103
13.17.7 View Subscriptions 105
14 Phasor Terminal 107
14.1 System Stability 107
14.2 Phasor Measurement Units 107
14.3 IEEE Synchrophasor Standard 107
14.4 Hardware Installation 107
14.5 Using the Main Window 107
14.6 Creating a New Device 108
14.7 Editing an Existing Device Configuration 108
14.8 Manage Device Connections 108
14.9 Using Phasor Terminal 108
14.10 Change a Device Name 109
14.11 Displaying Quantities 109
14.12 Selecting Items to Display 109
14.12.1 Changing Plot Properties 109
14.12.2 Displaying Data in a Relative View 109
14.12.3 Changing Plot Name 110
14.13 View Device Properties 110
14.14 View Point Properties 110
14.15 Connect to a Device 110
14.16 Disconnect From a Device 111
14.17 Control Commands 111
14.18 Capturing Binary Data 111
14.19 Export Data 111
14.20 Modify Data Archive Settings 111
15 Offline Fault Locator 113
15.1 Create a New Network 113
15.2 Define Nodes 113
15.3 Define Lines 114
15.4 Network Design Requirements 115
15.5 Example Networks 115
15.5.1 Example 1 115
15.5.2 Example 2 117

iv P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6
S1 Agile Contents

15.6 Locate Faults 119


15.6.1 COMTRADE Requirements 120
15.7 Network Topologies and Restrictions 122
15.8 Looped Networks 122
15.9 Supported Topologies 123
15.9.1 Two Terminal Network 123
15.9.2 Three Terminal One Junction Network 123
15.9.3 Three Terminal Two Junction Network 124
15.9.4 Four Terminal One Junction Network 124
15.9.5 Four Terminal Two Junction Network 125
15.9.6 Four Terminal Three Junction Network 125
15.9.7 Five Terminal One Junction Network 126
15.9.8 Five Terminal Two Junction Network 126
15.9.9 Five Terminal Three Junction Network 127
15.9.10 Five Terminal Four Junction Network 127
15.9.11 Six Terminal One Junction Network 128
15.9.12 Six Terminal Two Junction Network 128
15.9.13 Six Terminal Three Junction Network 129
15.9.14 Six Terminal Four Junction Network 129
16 Redundant Ethernet Configurator 131
16.1 Connecting the IED to a PC 131
16.2 Installing the Configurator 131
16.3 Starting the Configurator 132
16.4 Device Identification 132
16.5 Selecting the Device Mode 132
16.6 Filter by Board Type 132
16.7 Password Confguration 132
16.8 IP Address Configuration 132
16.9 SNTP IP Address Configuration 133
16.10 Check MAC Table for Connected Equipment 133
16.11 PRP Configuration 133
16.12 HSR Configuration 133
16.13 RSTP Configuration 134
16.14 Bridge parameters 134
16.15 Port Parameters 134
16.16 Port States 135
16.17 Failover Configuration 135
16.18 Filtering Database 135
16.19 End of Session 136
17 PRP/HSR Configurator 137
17.1 Connecting the IED to a PC 137
17.2 Starting the Configurator 137
17.3 PRP/HSR Device Identification 138
17.4 Selecting the Device Mode 138
17.5 PRP/HSR IP Address Configuration 138
17.6 SNTP IP Address Configuration 138
17.7 Check for Connected Equipment 138
17.8 PRP Configuration 138
17.9 HSR Configuration 139
17.10 Filtering Database 139
17.11 End of Session 140
18 RSTP Configurator 141
18.1 Connecting the IED to a PC 141
18.2 Starting the Configurator 141
18.3 RSTP Device Identification 142
18.4 RSTP IP Address Configuration 142
18.5 SNTP IP Address Configuration 142

P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6 v
Contents S1 Agile

18.6 Check for Connected Equipment 142


18.7 RSTP Configuration 142
18.7.1 Bridge parameters 143
18.7.2 Port Parameters 143
18.7.3 Port States 143
18.8 End of Session 143
19 Switch Manager 144
19.1 Installation 144
19.2 Setup 145
19.3 Network Setup 145
19.4 Bandwidth Used 145
19.5 Reset Counters 145
19.6 Check for Connected Equipment 146
19.7 Mirroring Function 146
19.8 Ports On/Off 146
19.9 VLAN 146
19.10 End of Session 147
20 AE2R 148
20.1 Initialisation File 148
20.2 Common Section 148
20.3 Communications Section 150
20.4 Setting the Password 151
20.5 Running AE2R 151
20.6 Inspecting the Extracted Event Files 151
21 AEDR2 152
21.1 Initialisation File 152
21.1.1 Common Section 152
21.1.2 Courier Section 153
21.1.3 IEC 60870-5-103 Section 154
21.1.4 Example INI File 155
21.2 Connection 155
21.3 Operation 155
21.4 Disturbance Record Files 156
21.5 Log File 156
21.6 Using the Scheduled Tasks Program 156
22 WinAEDR2 158
22.1 Functions 158
23 Wavewin 159
23.1 File Manager Features 159
23.2 Save as Comtrade 159
24 Device (Menu) Text Editor 161
24.1 Open a Connection 161
24.2 Change Connection Password 161
24.3 Open a Menu Text File as a Reference 161
24.4 Edit Text File of Device 161
24.5 Send Edited Text File to Device 161
25 Settings Excel Export 163
25.1 Mapping Files 163
25.1.1 Export Default Mapping 163
25.1.2 Create Custom Mapping 163
25.1.3 Create Custom Mapping from Default Mapping 163
25.1.4 Hide or Show Mapped Settings 163
25.2 Exporting an Excel File 164
25.2.1 Export to XRIO 164
25.2.2 About XRIO 164
25.2.3 Export to CSV 165
25.2.4 Export to CAPE 165

vi P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6
S1 Agile Contents

25.3 Importing an Excel File 165


25.4 Hide or Show Read Only Settings 165
25.5 Select Language 166
26 P747 Busbar Commissioning Tool (Remote HMI) 167
26.1 Scheme Editor 167
26.1.1 Connections 167
26.1.2 Scheme Elements 168
26.1.3 Working with Text on the Scheme 168
26.2 Protection Data Monitor 169
26.2.1 Connect to the IED 169
27 Dynamic Synoptic 171
27.1 Synoptic Main Window 171
27.2 Synoptic Main Window 171
27.3 Menu 174
27.3.1 File 174
27.3.2 Device 175
27.4 Tools 175
27.5 View 175
27.5.1 Device Data 176
27.5.2 Logic Values of the CU 176
27.5.3 Logic Values of the PU 176
27.5.4 CU Analogue Values 176
27.5.5 PU Analogue Values 177
27.6 Help 177
28 Remote HMI 178
28.1 Communication Settings 178
28.1.1 Serial Settings 178
28.1.2 Ethernet Settings 179
28.2 Scheme Editor 180
28.2.1 Principle of Operation 180
28.2.2 Constraints 185
28.3 Scheme Design 185
28.3.1 Creating a New Scheme 185
28.3.2 Creating a Busbar 185
28.3.3 Creating a Busbar Link 185
28.3.4 Creating a Tie Group 186
28.3.5 Creating a Feeder Group 186
28.3.6 Association of Zones for Isolators 186
28.3.7 Edit Options 187
28.4 Dynamic Synoptic 188
28.5 Dynamic Synoptic 188
28.5.1 File 188
28.5.2 Edit 189
28.5.3 View 189
28.5.4 Device 189
28.5.5 Mode 190
28.5.6 Language 190

P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6 vii
Contents S1 Agile

viii P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6
SETTINGS APPLICATION SOFTWARE
Settings Application Software S1 Agile

2 P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6
S1 Agile Settings Application Software

1 INTRODUCTION
MiCOM S1 Agile enables you to manage MiCOM devices in your system. You can build a list of devices and organise
them in the same way as they physically exist in a real-world system. Parameters can be created and uploaded for
each device, and they can be supervised directly.

P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6 3
Settings Application Software S1 Agile

2 USER INTERFACE

2.1 TILE STRUCTURE

P74x File Dynamic


Merger Synoptic
P746 Remote
HMI Tool
Distibuted SLD Editor
Busbar Tools
P747 Remote
HMI Tool S&R Courier
Tool

Menu Text PSL Editor


Centralised
Editor
Busbar Tools PSL File
GOOSE
Open File Editor
Device Text UCA2 GOOSE
File File
View, Change and
Save Settings Open File
Disturbance Events File
Record File
Select IED
UPC Tool
Settings File
View, Change and P40 Agile Px20, K Series
Save Settings Device Text to Agile Settings
DNP3.0 Editor Convertor
Settings File
Select IED Settings File Phasor
Conversion Terminal
MCL 61850 File SCU
Configurator
Settings File
IED Configurator Fault Locator MU320
Px40/K/L Conversion MU Agile
Px20 (Courier) Configurator Configurator

RPV Support P50 Agile Configurator Product


Selector Delete
Tool Reason DR60 Smart Grid System
Configurator Help
Data Model
Open File Manager New System
Disturbance Online
Record File Resources
S&R-103 Tool Device Help Export
Px30, Px30C, Configuration System
Bay Template CX30, PG88, PG89 Open
Bay Template Configurator Files System
Quick S1 Agile System
Configurator (BTC) Explorer
Connect
Px10, Px20, PX20C, Import
Settings File M720, Modulex System
Disturbance
Open File Importing
Log Record AEDR2 Record Viewer
Ethernet SCL
File
MCL61850 File WinAEDR2 Configuration
Wavewin
S&R MODBUS
Open File IED Configurator Switch Manager
Tool
Disturbance
Record File
Open File GOOSE
Events File Open File Redundant Ethernet Configurator
Settings File
Configurator
conversion
Settings File
Open File Px20, K-Series to
Open File P40Agile Settings
Conversion Tool
V01800

Figure 1: Tile structure

4 P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6
S1 Agile Settings Application Software

2.2 MENU STRUCTURE

PSL File MCL 61850 BTC File Settings File


Px40 File Px30 Events File
DNP3 File
Px40 UCA2 GOOSE
file Px40 Px10, Px20, Disturbance
PX20C, M720, Record File
Settings File Modulex
Open Default
File Device Text
File Px40
Close System Settings File MCL 61850 File
New System Delete
Compact System
System
Px30, Px30C, CX30, Log Record File
Open System PG88, PG89
Export
System
Open File Disturbance
Bay Template Record File
Import File
System Configurator File

Help
Import SCL
S1 Help Settings File
UCA2 GOOSE
Recent S1 Agile Quick Start File
Systems Exit Guide

Glossary Px40/K/L
DNP3.0 settings
Start Page Px20 (Courier)
Preferences File
Contact us
Search
Results Device Text
View S1 Web
Options Page
File

SLD Editor
Properties
Language PSL File Events File
System
Explorer
Disturbance
Print Change Address by Serial Record File
Number (Px40/K/L)
Print

IED Configurator MCL 61850 File


Print Prieview

Page Setup
PSL Editor
Px40
Text Editor
Tools
PSL Editor
Px30
DR Viewer:
Eview
Device Text
Editor Px40
DR Viewer: BTC Editor
Wavewin Px30 Device Text
Editor Px30
V01801

Figure 2: Menu structure

P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6 5
Settings Application Software S1 Agile

3 GETTING STARTED
This Settings Application software allows you to create a model of a power system which simulates a real-world
protection system. You can add substations, bays, voltage levels and devices to the system. First you need to
download the data models for the devices in the system. Then you can either create a new system or open an
existing system. You can connect to an IED either directly through the front port or to an IED in the system model.
You can then send or extract settings. You can also extract PSL, Events or Disturbance Record files, as well as
certain data protocol files.
If there is no default system, select Quick Connect from the menu to automatically create one.
If a system is no longer needed, right-click it and select Delete to permanently delete it.
Systems are not opened automatically. To change this, select Options then Preferences then check the checkbox
Reopen last System at start-up.

Start

Start Data Model


Manager

Download data
models

Start S1 Agile

Open
Click System system Offline
Explorer tile then Open system or
Online or offline?
New System tile or open file?
Open System tile Online
Open file

From menu bar Click Device Connect correct cable


Select View > System Configuration tile then between PC and IED
Explorer Px40 tile front panel.

In System Explorer Click Quick Connect


pane, right click Select tile depending on tile
system and add file type: settings, PSL,
Substation, Voltage 61850, DNP3,
Level, Bay, and disturbance record, Open system or
Device Courier, UCA2 create new system
GOOSE or events
Right click Device Select IED type
Yes
Connections Need new
subfolder to create connections?
new connections Open existing file or
No Open default file Select front, rear or
Right click Device type Ethernet port
subfolders to view
properties and add or Check connection
extract files Edit and Save parameters then click
Finish

No
Setting
complete?
Yes
Stop V01802

Figure 3: Flowchart showing how S1 Agile can be used to set up and save a protection system offline or online.

6 P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6
S1 Agile Settings Application Software

3.1 QUICK SYSTEM GUIDE


S1 Agile allows you to create a model of a protection system which simulates a real-world protection system. You
can add substations, bays, voltage levels and devices to the system. First you need to download the data models
for the devices in the system. Then you can either create a new system or open an existing system.
You can connect to an IED either directly through the front port or to an IED in the system model. You can then
send or extract settings. You can also extract a PSL, DNP3, Events or Disturbance Record file.
If there is no default system, use Quick Connect to automatically create one. If a system is no longer needed, right-
click it and select Delete to permanently delete it.
Systems are not opened automatically. To change this, select Options then Preferences then check the checkbox
Reopen last System at start-up.

3.2 DOWNLOAD DATA MODELS


1. Close S1 Agile and run the Data Model Manager.
2. Follow the on-screen instructions.

3.3 SET UP A SYSTEM


1. Click the System Explorer tile then the New System tile or Open System tile.
2. From the menu bar select View then System Explorer.
3. In the System Explorer pane, right click System and select New Substation, New Voltage Level, New Bay,
and New Device.
4. Right-click the Device subfolders to view properties and add or extract files.

3.4 CONNECT TO AN IED


1. Connect the PC and IED as required.
2. From the main screen, click Quick Connect.
3. Select the product range.
4. Select connection to the required port.
5. Set the connection parameters and click Finish.

3.5 CONNECT TO AN IED IN A SYSTEM


1. Make sure that the correct physical connection is in place.
2. Find the device in the system explorer and create the appropriate connection. If the connection already
exists, right click on it and select the Test Connection option.
3. Set the connection parameters and click Finish.

3.6 SEND SETTINGS TO A DEVICE


To send settings to a device there must be at least one setting file in a settings folder for a device.
1. Right-click the device name in System Explorer and select Send.
2. In the Send To dialog select the setting files and click Send.
3. Click Close to close the Send To dialog.

P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6 7
Settings Application Software S1 Agile

3.7 EXTRACT SETTINGS FROM A DEVICE


1. Using System Explorer, find the device.
2. Right-click the device's Settings folder and select Extract Settings or Extract Full Settings.
3. Once the settings file is retrieved, click Close.

3.8 COMPARE SETTINGS FILES


1. In the System Explorer, find the desired first file to compare.
2. If the two files to be compared are within the same S1 system, right-click the settings file and select
Compare - First File.
3. Find the second settings file, right-click on it and select Compare - Second File.
4. A comparison page will be launched. If the second file was outside of the system, select Compare with
External File when right clicking on the settings file, then browse for the second file and the same
comparison page will be launched.
5. By default, the comparison will show the visible settings that are different between the two files. Any
invisible settings due to disabled features will not be compared.
6. At the top left there is a display filter option. Different options are available to select the data presented.
7. Settings can differ in the value or in the user note attached to it.

Note:
User Notes can be added to individual cells for MiCOM P40 Agile setting files which can be compared using the setting file
comparison. One application example of the User Notes comparison is to add user notes to each setting cell to identify if they
should be ‘Fixed’ or ‘Flexible’ or are ‘Unused’. Then using the setting file comparison these notes can be compared to verify the
cells with the User Note 'Fixed' have the same pre-set value and any cell with the User Note ‘Flexible’ can have different values
and any cell with the User Note 'Unused' has a default value. When comparing two setting files with User Notes in each file
the columns can be sorted by User Note Name (Ascending or Descending) to make the comparison easier.

3.9 EXTRACT A DNP3 FILE FROM A DEVICE


1. Using System Explorer, find the device.
2. Right-click the device's DNP3 folder and select Extract.
3. Once the file is retrieved, click Close.

3.10 EXTRACT AN EVENTS FILE FROM A DEVICE


1. Using System Explorer, find the device.
2. Right-click the device's Events folder and select Extract Events.
3. Once the file is retrieved, click Close.

3.11 EXTRACT A DISTURBANCE RECORD FROM A DEVICE


1. Using System Explorer, find the device.
2. Right-click the device's Disturbance Records folder and select Extract Disturbances.
3. Select a disturbance record to extract.
4. Choose a COMTRADE format, 1991 or 2001.
5. Click Extract or Save. Save leaves the record in the device, Extract deletes it.
6. Once the disturbance records file is retrieved, click Close.

8 P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6
S1 Agile Settings Application Software

4 CYBER SECURITY

4.1 OVERVIEW
In the past, substation networks were traditionally isolated and the protocols and data formats used to transfer
information between devices were often proprietary.
For these reasons, the substation environment was very secure against cyber-attacks. The terms used for this
inherent type of security are:
● Security by isolation (if the substation network is not connected to the outside world, it cannot be accessed
from the outside world).
● Security by obscurity (if the formats and protocols are proprietary, it is very difficult to interpret them).

However, note that these are not recognised defences against attackers.
The increasing sophistication of protection schemes, coupled with the advancement of technology and the desire
for vendor interoperability, has resulted in standardisation of networks and data interchange within substations.
Today, devices within substations use standardised protocols for communication. Furthermore, substations can be
interconnected with open networks, such as the internet or corporate-wide networks, which use standardised
protocols for communication. This introduces a major security risk making the grid vulnerable to cyber-attacks,
which could in turn lead to major electrical outages.
Clearly, there is now a need to secure communication and equipment within substation environments. This
chapter describes the security measures that have been put in place for our range of Intelligent Electronic Devices
(IEDs).

Note:
Cyber-security compatible devices do not enforce NERC compliance, they merely facilitate it. It is the responsibility of the user
to ensure that compliance is adhered to as and when necessary.

4.2 THE NEED FOR CYBER-SECURITY


Cyber-security provides protection against unauthorised disclosure, transfer, modification, or destruction of
information or information systems, whether accidental or intentional. To achieve this, there are several security
requirements:
● Confidentiality (preventing unauthorised access to information)
● Integrity (preventing unauthorised modification)
● Availability/Authentication (preventing the denial of service and assuring authorised access to information)
● Non-repudiation (preventing the denial of an action that took place)
● Traceability/Detection (monitoring and logging of activity to detect intrusion and analyse incidents)

The threats to cyber-security may be unintentional (e.g. natural disasters, human error), or intentional (e.g. cyber-
attacks by hackers).
Good cyber-security can be achieved with a range of measures, such as closing down vulnerability loopholes,
implementing adequate security processes and procedures and providing technology to help achieve this.
Examples of vulnerabilities are:
● Indiscretions by personnel (users keep passwords on their computer)
● Bad practice (users do not change default passwords, or everyone uses the same password to access all
substation equipment)
● Bypassing of controls (users turn off security measures)
● Inadequate technology (substation is not firewalled)

P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6 9
Settings Application Software S1 Agile

Examples of availability issues are:


● Equipment overload, resulting in reduced or no performance
● Expiry of a certificate preventing access to equipment

To help tackle these issues, standards organisations have produced various standards. Compliance with these
standards significantly reduces the threats associated with lack of cyber-security.

4.3 STANDARDS
There are several standards, which apply to substation cyber-security. The standards currently applicable to GE
IEDs are NERC and IEEE1686.
Standard Country Description
Framework for the protection of the grid critical Cyber
NERC CIP (North American Electric Reliability Corporation) USA
Assets
Requirements for Secure Control and Telecommunication
BDEW (German Association of Energy and Water Industries) Germany
Systems
ICS oriented then Relevant for EPU completing existing
ANSI ISA 99 USA standard and identifying new topics such as patch
management
International Standard for substation IED cyber-security
IEEE 1686 International
capabilities

IEC 62351 International Power system data and Comm. protocol

Framework for the protection of the grid critical Cyber


ISO/IEC 27002 International
Assets
Complete framework for SCADA SP800-82and ICS cyber-
NIST SP800-53 (National Institute of Standards and Technology) USA
security
CPNI Guidelines (Centre for the Protection of National Clear and valuable good practices for Process Control and
UK
Infrastructure) SCADA security

4.3.1 NERC COMPLIANCE


The North American Electric Reliability Corporation (NERC) created a set of standards for the protection of critical
infrastructure. These are known as the CIP standards (Critical Infrastructure Protection). These were introduced to
ensure the protection of 'Critical Cyber Assets', which control or have an influence on the reliability of North
America’s electricity generation and distribution systems.
These standards have been compulsory in the USA for several years now. Compliance auditing started in June
2007, and utilities face extremely heavy fines for non-compliance.

NERC CIP standards


CIP standard Description
CIP-002-1 Critical Cyber Assets Define and document the Critical Assets and the Critical Cyber Assets
Define and document the Security Management Controls required to protect the Critical
CIP-003-1 Security Management Controls
Cyber Assets
Define and Document Personnel handling and training required protecting Critical Cyber
CIP-004-1 Personnel and Training
Assets
Define and document logical security perimeters where Critical Cyber Assets reside.
CIP-005-1 Electronic Security
Define and document measures to control access points and monitor electronic access
Define and document Physical Security Perimeters within which Critical Cyber Assets
CIP-006-1 Physical Security
reside

10 P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6
S1 Agile Settings Application Software

CIP standard Description


Define and document system test procedures, account and password management,
CIP-007-1 Systems Security Management security patch management, system vulnerability, system logging, change control and
configuration required for all Critical Cyber Assets
CIP-008-1 Incident Reporting and Response Define and document procedures necessary when Cyber-security Incidents relating to
Planning Critical Cyber Assets are identified
CIP-009-1 Recovery Plans Define and document Recovery plans for Critical Cyber Assets

4.3.1.1 CIP 002


CIP 002 concerns itself with the identification of:
● Critical assets, such as overhead lines and transformers
● Critical cyber assets, such as IEDs that use routable protocols to communicate outside or inside the
Electronic Security Perimeter; or are accessible by dial-up

Power utility responsibilities: GE's contribution:


We can help the power utilities to create this asset register automatically.
Create the list of the assets
We can provide audits to list the Cyber assets

4.3.1.2 CIP 003


CIP 003 requires the implementation of a cyber-security policy, with associated documentation, which
demonstrates the management’s commitment and ability to secure its Critical Cyber Assets.
The standard also requires change control practices whereby all entity or vendor-related changes to hardware
and software components are documented and maintained.
Power utility responsibilities: GE's contribution:
We can help the power utilities to have access control to its critical assets by
providing centralized Access control.
To create a Cyber-security Policy
We can help the customer with its change control by providing a section in the
documentation where it describes changes affecting the hardware and software.

4.3.1.3 CIP 004


CIP 004 requires that personnel with authorized cyber access or authorized physical access to Critical Cyber
Assets, (including contractors and service vendors), have an appropriate level of training.
Power utility responsibilities: GE's contribution:
To provide appropriate training of its personnel We can provide cyber-security training

4.3.1.4 CIP 005


CIP 005 requires the establishment of an Electronic Security Perimeter (ESP), which provides:
● The disabling of ports and services that are not required
● Permanent monitoring and access to logs (24x7x365)
● Vulnerability Assessments (yearly at a minimum)
● Documentation of Network Changes

Power utility responsibilities: GE's contribution:


To monitor access to the ESP
To disable all ports not used in the IED
To perform the vulnerability assessments
To monitor and record all access to the IED
To document network changes

P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6 11
Settings Application Software S1 Agile

4.3.1.5 CIP 006


CIP 006 states that Physical Security controls, providing perimeter monitoring and logging along with robust
access controls, must be implemented and documented. All cyber assets used for Physical Security are considered
critical and should be treated as such:
Power utility responsibilities: GE's contribution:
Provide physical security controls and perimeter monitoring.
Ensure that people who have access to critical cyber assets don’t have GE cannot provide additional help with this aspect.
criminal records.

4.3.1.6 CIP 007


CIP 007 covers the following points:
● Test procedures
● Ports and services
● Security patch management
● Antivirus
● Account management
● Monitoring
● An annual vulnerability assessment should be performed

Power utility responsibilities: GE's contribution:


Test procedures, we can provide advice and help on testing.
Ports and services, our devices can disable unused ports and services
To provide an incident response team and have Security patch management, we can provide assistance
appropriate processes in place Antivirus, we can provide advise and assistance
Account management, we can provide advice and assistance
Monitoring, our equipment monitors and logs access

4.3.1.7 CIP 008


CIP 008 requires that an incident response plan be developed, including the definition of an incident response
team, their responsibilities and associated procedures.
Power utility responsibilities: GE's contribution:
To provide an incident response team and have appropriate
GE cannot provide additional help with this aspect.
processes in place.

4.3.1.8 CIP 009


CIP 009 states that a disaster recovery plan should be created and tested with annual drills.
Power utility responsibilities: GE's contribution:
To provide guidelines on recovery plans and backup/restore
To implement a recovery plan
documentation

4.3.2 IEEE 1686-2013


IEEE 1686-2013 is an IEEE Standard for substation IEDs' cyber-security capabilities. It proposes practical and
achievable mechanisms to achieve secure operations.
The following features described in this standard apply:
● Passwords are 8 characters long and can contain upper-case, lower-case, numeric and special characters.
● Passwords are never displayed or transmitted to a user.

12 P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6
S1 Agile Settings Application Software

● IED functions and features are assigned to different password levels. The assignment is fixed.
● The audit trail is recorded, listing events in the order in which they occur, held in a circular buffer.
● Records contain all defined fields from the standard and record all defined function event types where the
function is supported.
● No password defeat mechanism exists. Instead a secure recovery password scheme is implemented.
● Unused ports (physical and logical) may be disabled.

4.4 CYBER-SECURITY IMPLEMENTATION


General Electric IEDs have always been and will continue to be equipped with state-of-the-art security measures.
Due to the ever-evolving communication technology and new threats to security, this requirement is not static.
Hardware and software security measures are continuously being developed and implemented to mitigate the
associated threats and risks.
From Software Version 90 onwards, the MiCOM P40 Agile products provide enhanced security through the
following features:
● An Authentication, Authorization, Accounting (AAA) Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service (RADIUS)
client that is managed centrally, enables user attribution, provides accounting of all user activities, and uses
secure standards based on strong cryptography for authentication and credential protection. In other
words, this option uses a RADIUS.
● Server for user authentication. There is provision for both remote (RADIUS) and local (device) authentication.
● A Role-Based Access Control (RBAC) system that provides a permission model that allows access to the
device operations and configurations based on specific roles and individual user accounts configured on
the AAA server. That is, Administrator, Engineer, Operator, and Viewer roles are used.
● Security event reporting through both proprietary event logs and the Syslog protocol for supporting Security
Information Event Management (SIEM) systems for centralised cybersecurity monitoring.
● Encryption of passwords – stored within the IED, in network messages between the MiCOM S1 Agile
software and the IED, and in network messages between the RADIUS server and the IED (subject to the
RADIUS server configuration).

4.4.1 INITIAL SETUP


The requirements for initial setup of the IED for cyber-security and RBAC will depend on:
1. which interfaces, if any, the cyber-security is required,
2. the intended authentication method, as defined in the setting Auth. Method’ in SECURITY CONFIG column
(see the Authentication methods section).
When the authentication method is configured as Device Only, there are four pre-defined usernames, VIEWER,
OPERATOR, ENGINEER, and ADMINISTRATOR that align with the VIEWER, OPERATOR, ENGINEER and
ADMINISTRATOR roles (see the Device Users section).
When the authentication method is configured as ‘Server Only’ or ‘Server + Device’, users must be set up on the
Radius server (see the RADIUS users section). These users are separate from the pre-defined Device users. RADIUS
server information must be configured in the IED to connect to the RADIUS server(s) for Server authentication (see
the RADIUS server settings section). It is recommended that the Radius shared secret be changed from the default
(see the RADIUS client-server validation section).
Whatever the authentication method, it is strongly recommended that the password for the Administrator be
changed from the default. Changing the passwords for the other roles is optional.

P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6 13
Settings Application Software S1 Agile

4.5 ROLES AND PERMISSIONS

4.5.1 ROLES
The P40 Agile products provide 4 specific roles to which individual user accounts can be configured:
● VIEWER (Level 0) Read some, Write minimal
● OPERATOR (Level 1) Read All, Write Few
● ENGINEER (Level 2) Read All, Write Some
● ADMINISTRATOR (Level 3) Read All, Write All

Only one role of one type is allowed to be logged in at a time. For example, one Operator can be logged in but not
a second Operator at the same time. This prevents subsets of settings from being changed at the same time.
Roles are mapped to Access Level definitions:
VIEWER - No password required - Read access to Security features, Model Number, Serial Number, S/W version,
Description, Plant reference, Security code (UI Only), Encryption key (UI Only), User Banner and security related cells.
This role will allow maximum concurrent access provided by P40. Viewer is the default role
OPERATOR – Operator password required - Read access to all data and settings. Write access to Primary/
Secondary selector, Operator password setting, Password reset cell and log extraction cells (record selector). This
role will not allow concurrent access.
ENGINEER – Engineer password required - Read access to all data and settings. Write access to Reset demands
and counters. This role will not allow concurrent access.
ADMINISTRATOR – Administrator password required - Read access to all data and settings. Write access to All
settings, PSL, IED Config, Security settings (port disabling etc). This role can enable the bypass mode and forcefully
logout any other role. This role will not allow concurrent access.
The IED defines the following roles with reference to the roles defined by IEC 62351-8.
P40 Roles IEC 62351- 8 Roles Access Level
VIEWER VIEWER Level 0
OPERATOR OPERATOR Level 1
ENGINEER ENGINEER Level 2
ADMINISTRATOR SECADM + SECAUD Level 3

By default, the IED is delivered with default factory roles account and passwords. These default passwords are
shown in the below table.
Role Default Password
ADMINISTRATOR ChangeMe1#
ENGINEER ChangeMe1#
OPERATOR ChangeMe1#
VIEWER NA

Note:
It is strongly recommended that the password for the Administrator be changed from the default. Changing the passwords
for the other roles is optional.

14 P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6
S1 Agile Settings Application Software

Administrators have the following rights as well:


● Setting the Bypass mode
● Forcefully logging out any other role
● Setting Authentication Method

'Firmware lock' is not supported by the P40 Agile IED. Firmware upgrade is not managed by the main software. The
process involves using a dedicated firmware loading software tool. There is no access or control to this process via
the main product firmware.

4.5.2 PERMISSIONS
Authentication and authorization are two different processes. An authenticated user cannot perform any action on
the IED unless a privilege has been explicitly granted to them. This is the concept of “least privileges” access.
Privileges must be granted to users through roles. A role is a collection of privileges, and roles are granted to users.
Each user is associated to only one role. The privilege/role matrix is stored on the IED. This is known as Role-Based-
Access Control (RBAC).
On successful user authentication, the IED will load the user’s role list. If the user’s role changes, the user must
logout and log back in to exercise his/her privileges.
Existing User level/permission mapping in P40 are:
Role Meaning Read Operation Write Operation
SYSTEM DATA column:
Description
Plant Reference
Model Number
Serial Number
S/W Ref.
Read Some
Access Level Password Entry
VIEWER Write
Security Feature LCD Contrast (UI only)
Minimal
SECURITY CONFIG column:
User Banner
Attempts Remain
Blk Time Remain
Fallback PW level
Security Code (UI only)
All data and settings are All items writeable at "Viewer".
Read All
OPERATOR readable. Select Event, Main and Fault (upload)
Write Few
Poll Measurements Extract Events (e.g. via MiCOM S1 Agile)
All items writeable at "Operator".
Setting Cells that change visibility (Visible/Invisible).
Setting Values (Primary/Secondary) selector
Read All All data and settings are
Commands:
ENGINEER Write readable.
Reset Indication
Some Poll Measurements
Reset Demand
Reset Statistics
Reset CB Data / counters

P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6 15
Settings Application Software S1 Agile

Role Meaning Read Operation Write Operation


All items writeable at "Engineer".
Change all Setting cells
Operations:
Extract and download Setting file.
Extract and download PSL
Extract and download MCL (IEC 61850)
Extraction of Disturbance Recorder
Courier/MODBUS Accept Event (auto event extraction, e.g.
All data and settings are via AE2R)
Read All
ADMINISTRATOR readable. Commands:
Write All
Poll Measurements Change Active Group setting
Close/Open CB
Change Comms device address.
Set Date & Time
Switch MCL banks/Switch Conf. Bank in UI (IEC 61850)
Enable/Disable Device ports (in SECURITY CONFIG column)
All password settings
Bypass Enable/disable
Change Authentication Method

The table below shows the predefined permissions assignment for the predefined Roles according to IEC 62351-8
File File File Setting
Role View Read Dataset Report Control Config. Security
Read Write Mngt Group
VIEWER x x
OPERATOR x x x x
ENGINEER x x x x x x x
ADMINISTRATOR x x x x x x x x x x x

The table below shows the predefined permissions description according to IEC 62351-8
Permission Description
Allows the subject/role to discover what objects are present within a Logical Device by presenting the type ID of those
VIEW
objects.
Allows the subject/role to obtain all or some of the values in addition to the type and ID of objects that are present within
READ
a Logical-Device
DATASET Allows the subject/role to have full management rights for both permanent and non-permanent DataSets
REPORTING Allows a subject/role to use buffered reporting as well as un-buffered reporting
FILEREAD Allows the subject/role to have read rights for file objects
FILEWRITE Allows the subject/role to have write rights for file objects. This right includes the FILEREAD right
FILEMNGT Allows the role to transfer files to the Logical-Device, as well as delete existing files on the Logical-Device
CONTROL Allows a subject to perform control operations
CONFIG Allows a subject to locally or remotely configure certain aspects of the server
SETTINGGROUP Allows a subject to remotely configure Settings Groups
SECURITY Allows a subject/role to perform security functions at both a Server/Service Access Point and Logical-Device basis

16 P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6
S1 Agile Settings Application Software

4.6 AUTHENTICATION

4.6.1 AUTHENTICATION METHODS


The IED supports Bypass (no authentication), Device authentication and Server authentication.
Authentication
Description
Method
IED does not provide security, any user (Local/Remote) can login to the IED. IED does not validate user and
Bypass Auth.
password. In this case, there is no need to enter user-id and password to login.
Device Only IED allows role access using local authentication.
Server Only IED uses RADIUS server to validate access.
IED uses server authentication to validate user first. And it allows fallback to device authentication if the
Server + Device
RADIUS server(s) are unavailable.

If Bypass Auth. is enabled, the IED ignores the Auth. Method setting.
The Auth. Method setting offers the following options for user authentication:
● Server + Device (This is the default setting for IEC 61850+Courier; IEC 61850+103; DNP3OE - where
applicable)
● Device Only (This is the default setting for Courier/IEC 60870-5-103/MODBUS/DNP3)
● Server Only

Only an ADMINISTRATOR role may change the Auth. Method setting. If Administrator changes it, the role remains
logged in. But only when the user log-out, their access-level is revoked.
If Authentication method is Server Only and RADIUS Server IP addresses are configured, no device user has
access to the IED (only the RADIUS users will have access). Only the RADIUS Administrator role will be able to
switch to "Server and Device auth". When the setting is “Server Only” but RADIUS Server IP are not configured (both
Primary & Secondary are 0.0.0.0), the IED will automatically fall back to Device authentication.
When Authentication method is Server Only, if the RADIUS server(s) are unavailable, the user should first take
actions to recover the RADIUS connection. If both RADIUS servers ultimately failed to recover, the user should
follow the password reset procedure to reset the Auth. Method setting to Device Only.

4.6.2 BYPASS
In Bypass Auth. mode, the IED does not provide security - any user can login. IED does not validate user and
password. The bypass security feature provides an easier access, with no authentication and encryption for
situations when this is considered safe. Only the Administrator can enable Bypass mode.
There are five modes for authentication bypass:
1. Disabled - no interfaces in Bypass Auth. mode (normal authentication is active)
2. Local & Remote
a. Front Panel;
b. Front Port
c. Rear Ports
d. Ethernet

P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6 17
Settings Application Software S1 Agile

3. Local - will bypass authentication for


a. Front Panel;
b. Front Port
4. Remote - will bypass authentication for
a. Ethernet
b. Rear Ports
5. HMI-Only – will bypass authentication only for front panel
Bypass authentication for
Front panel Front Port Rear Port Ethernet
Bypass mode:
Disabled
Local & Remote X X X X
Local X X
Remote X X
HMI-Only X

The DDB signal Security Bypass is available to indicate that the IED is in Bypass Auth. mode.

4.6.3 LOGIN
A user can only login through the following methods:
● Front Panel User Interface
● Using MiCOM S1 Agile, connected to either the Front Port, Rear Port 1 or 2, or NIC (Ethernet) interface.

The interfaces/protocols implemented in P40 are listed in the following table.


The product supports both RBAC (with Server + Device authentication) and original Access Level. The Courier
Interfaces/HMI use the RBAC whilst other protocols such as MODBUS, IEC 60870-5-103, DNP3 use the original
Access Level to authenticate.
The following table shows different product variants that supports different protocols on Rear ports and Network
port.
Local
Front Port Rear Port (1/2) NIC (Ethernet) Port Supported Auth. Mechanism
Access
HMI
Courier Courier - Device
Courier
HMI IEC 61850 + SNMP + Courier
Courier Courier Server and Device
Courier tunnel
MODBUS
HMI Device
Courier (no server, device auth only, old -
Courier Old Access level for MODBUS
access levels)
IEC 60870-5-103
HMI Device
Courier (no server, device auth only, old -
Courier Old Access level for 103
access levels)
IEC 60870-5-103
HMI IEC 61850 + SNMP + Courier Server and Device
Courier (no server, device auth only, old
Courier tunnel Old Access level for 103
access levels)
DNP3
HMI Device
Courier (no server, device auth only, old -
Courier Old Access level for DNP3
access levels)
HMI Server and Device
Courier Courier DNP3 + SNMP + Courier tunnel
Courier Old Access level for DNP3

18 P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6
S1 Agile Settings Application Software

4.6.3.1 FRONT PANEL LOGIN


Front panel User Interface supports both Device authentication and Server authentication. The P40 gives the user
the option to enter a username in HMI panel.
The user can type their password in the password cell.
For Device authentication, the user must enter one of the pre-defined usernames VIEWER, OPERATOR, ENGINEER,
ADMINISTRATOR. The user can scroll through these names using either of the hotkeys. Users must then enter their
password.
For Server authentication, the user can enter any valid pre-defined Radius server username. Using the front panel
User Interface, the user can change the displayed character type (digit, uppercase letter, lowercase letter, special
character) by either of the hotkeys. For ease of typing, it is preferable to do Server authentication login using
MiCOM S1 Agile.
After successful log in, a confirmation message is displayed, showing the logged in username. For example:

LOGIN SUCCESS
OPERATOR

4.6.3.2 MICOM S1 LOGIN


When the user attempts to login, MiCOM S1 Agile will prompt the user with a login dialog box that contains a
username text entry field and a password text entry field. The username field is a combo-dropdown style text field
that includes the fixed usernames (Administrator, Engineer, Operator, Viewer) for Device authentication - the
user can pick one of these if they wish, or type any other pre-defined username for Radius authentication in the
textbox.

4.6.3.3 WARNING BANNER


After successful authentication and authorisation to access the IED, MiCOM S1 Agile will display a security warning
banner to the user.
If I Agree is selected, the integrated authentication and authorisation is completed. Selecting I Disagree causes
the program to close and the login user to logout.
For S1 Agile authentication, this is a pop-up dialog that the user must click to acknowledge.

4.6.3.4 LOGIN FAILED


When Device authentication fails, a failure message is displayed:

LOGIN FAILED

For front panel authentication, this is shown for 2 seconds on the LCD.
For S1 Agile authentication, this is a pop-up dialog that the user must click to acknowledge.

4.6.4 USER SESSIONS


Open sessions will be automatically closed by the IED after a configurable session timeout.
The inactivity timer configuration setting defines the period of time that the IED waits in idleness before a logged in
user is automatically logged out.
If there is any data change that does not commit to IED, the data change is discarded when user logged out. If
there is any access that does not finish, the access will fail when user logged out. Front panel will display the
default page when user reaches the defined inactivity time.

P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6 19
Settings Application Software S1 Agile

If the keypad is inactive for configured UI inactivity timer, user logout message is displayed. And front panel user
interface reverts to the Viewer access level.
Currently in the P40, the inactivity timer for both front port and HMI is fixed to 15 minutes. Already, RP1
InactivTimer and RP2 InactivTimer settings control the inactivity timer for RP1 and RP2. There are two new
settings to support configurable inactivity timer for front port and front panel user interface:
● FP InactvTimer
● UI InactivTimer

Administrator, Operator and Engineer roles will accept only one session to the device at one time. Only Viewer
allows 4 concurrent sessions at one time.
Only one user session is allowed from all the access methods mentioned below:
● Front Panel Push buttons
● Front Port (serial) FP1
● Rear Port 1 (RP1)
● Rear Port 2 (RP2)
● Ethernet Port (NIC)

Minimum
Setting Name Description Min Max Default Units
Permissions
Number of failed authentications before the device blocks
0 (lockout
Attempts Limit subsequent authentication attempts for the lockout period. A 99 3 - Administrator
disabled)
value of 0 means Lockout is disabled.
The period of time in seconds a user is prevented from logging
Lockout Period 1 5940 5 sec Administrator
in, after being locked out.
FP Inactivity Timer is the time of idleness on Front Port before 0 (no
FP InactivTimer a logged in user is automatically logged out and revert the Inactivity 30 10 min Administrator
access level to the viewer role Timeout)
UI Inactivity Timer is the time of idleness on Front Panel 0 (no
UI InactivTimer before a logged in user is automatically logged out and revert Inactivity 30 10 min Administrator
the access level to the viewer role Timeout)

The recommended settings for Attempts Limit is 3 and Lockout Period is 5 sec to discourage brute force
attacks. If the Lockout period is too large, anybody can lockout Device users.

4.6.5 USER LOCKING POLICY


A local user locking policy is implemented for Device access:
● This user locking policy applies to both Device users.
● The account is unlocked at the first successful login after the Lockout Period
● By default, if the user consecutively fails to login 3 times, the user account will be locked for 3 minutes.

Each user account records how long it has been locked if the account is locked.
Each user account records how many times it has consecutively failed to login. User account failed times include
all interfaces login attempts. For example, if the Attempts Limit setting is 3 and the operator failed to login from
front panel 2 times, and they changed to login from the Courier interface, but failed again, then the Operator
would be locked out.
When the IED is powered on, these Attempts Limit counter resets to zero.
When the user account exceeds the Attempts Limit it is locked for Lockout period, at that time Attempt limit
resets to zero.

20 P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6
S1 Agile Settings Application Software

The locked user account will be unlocked automatically, after the configured “Lockout Period” is expired.
All user accounts need to wait until the lockout period expires. No user can unlock the locked account.
If the locked account attempts to login the IED from the Front Panel, the following text is displayed (example):

OPERATOR
IS LOCKED

Usernames are specific to each user account, such as Engineer, Operator and Administrator for Device
authentication.
When supporting both RBAC enabled interfaces and non-RBAC interfaces (such as MODBUS), the P40 handles
features such as user-locking feature as follows
● If an RBAC user exceeds the invalid password limit, that user gets locked for all the interfaces.
● On a non-RBAC interface, if an Access Level exceeds the invalid password limit, P40 only blocks that.

4.6.6 LOGOUT
Each user should Log out after reading or configuring the IED.
Both S1 Agile and the Front Panel provide a one step logout.
The user can only log out from the front panel, if they logged in from the front panel. If the user logged in from S1
Agile, they have to logout from S1 Agile.

4.6.6.1 FRONT PANEL LOGOUT


Go up to the top of the menu tree. When you are at the Column Heading level and you press the Up button, you
may be prompted to log out with the following display:

ENTER TO LOGOUT
CLEAR TO CANCEL

If you confirm, the following message is displayed for 2 seconds:

LOGGED OUT <ROLE


NAME>
LOGGED OUT
ADMINISTRATOR

If you decide not to log out (i.e. you cancel), the following message is displayed for 2 seconds.

LOGOUT CANCELLED
ADMINISTRATOR

4.6.6.2 MICOM S1 LOGOUT


Right-click on the device name in the System Explorer panel in MiCOM S1 Agile and select Log Off.
In the Log Off confirmation dialog, click Yes.

P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6 21
Settings Application Software S1 Agile

4.6.7 DEVICE USERS


For device authentication, the user must enter one of the pre-defined usernames VIEWER, OPERATOR, ENGINEER,
or ADMINISTRATOR. This means that device users and roles are same in the P40, and therefore there can be only
one user for each role.

4.6.8 PASSWORD POLICY


Cyber-security requires strong passwords and validation for NERC compliance.
The NERC password complexity policy requires an alpha-numeric password (for all accesses, front panel, and
network/local port) that meets the following mandatory requirements:
1. Passwords cannot contain the user's account name or parts of the user's full name that exceed two
consecutive characters.
2. Passwords must be at least eight characters in length, but not exceed 16 characters in length.
3. Passwords must contain characters from all four categories:
a. English uppercase characters (A through Z).
b. English lowercase characters (a through z).
c. Numeric (digits 0 through 9).
d. Special non-alphanumeric characters (such as @,!,#,{, but not limited to only those)
For Device authentication, the IED will enforce that configured passwords meet these requirements.
For Server authentication, the password complexity and user locking policy is defined in the external Radius server.

4.6.9 CHANGE PASSWORD


In the Device authentication mode, VIEWER does not have a password associated with it.
The password can be changed either from the front panel User Interface, or from MiCOM S1 Agile using the
Change/Set Password option in the Supervise Device dialog box.

Caution:
It is recommended that user passwords are changed periodically.

4.6.10 RADIUS
When the Auth. Method setting is configured as Server Only or Server + Device, a user must log in with a
username and password that has been predefined on the Radius server.
This log in can be performed from any interface, as described in the Login section. The IED will authenticate the
user to the active RADIUS server, over the Ethernet connection.

Groups User
Access Request
User login RADIUS
IED Client
Access
Accept
(User Role)
User RADIUS Server Active Directory

V01100

Figure 4: RADIUS server/client communication

22 P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6
S1 Agile Settings Application Software

4.6.10.1 RADIUS USERS


For Server authentication, RADIUS users and passwords are created in the RADIUS server (in the Active Directory).
The username must consist of uppercase letters (A to Z) and digits (0 to 9) only. No lowercase letters or special
characters are allowed.
Each RADIUS user must have a password that meets the password policy of the Active Directory (not the password
policy of the P40) and have one of the four roles assigned in the Active Directory.
The number of RADIUS users is not limited by the IED.
RADIUS password changes are done in the Active Directory (after password expiration).

4.6.10.2 RADIUS CLIENT


Two Radius servers are supported by the IED in the configuration for redundancy. The IED will try each in sequence
until one responds.
The IED will first try server 1 up to the configured number of retries, leaving a request timeout between each
request. If, after this point there is still no valid answer from server 1, the IED will switch to server 2 and repeat for
up to the configured number of retries.
If the number of retries for the second server is exceeded, the IED will give up entirely on Server authentication. If
Authentication Method is Server + Device, the IED will fallback to Device authentication. A RADIUS Server
unavailable security event is also logged under this condition.
The RADIUS implementation supports the following authentication protocols:
● EAP-TTLS-MSCHAP2
● PAP
● EAP-PEAP-MSCHAP2
● PAP EAP-TTLS-PAP (Default)

The RADIUS implementation queries the Role ID vendor attribute and establish the logged in user security context
with that role.
RADIUS Config. Value
Vendor ID 2910
Vendor Attribute 1
P40 Role Values
Administrator 3
Engineer 2
Operator 1
Viewer 0

4.6.10.3 RADIUS SERVER SETTINGS


The following RADIUS server information must be configured in the IED to connect to the RADIUS server(s) for
Server authentication.
Setting Minimum
Description Min Max Default Units
Name Permissions
IP address of Server 1. Default value
RADIUS
indicates no Primary Radius server is 0.0.0.0 255.255.255.255 0.0.0.0 - Administrator
Pri IP
configured, and so Radius is disabled.

P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6 23
Settings Application Software S1 Agile

Setting Minimum
Description Min Max Default Units
Name Permissions
IP address of Server 2. Default value
RADIUS
indicates no Secondary Radius server 0.0.0.0 255.255.255.255 0.0.0.0 - Administrator
Sec IP
is configured
RADIUS
Radius authentication port 1 65535 1812 - Administrator
Auth Port
EAP-TTLS-MSCHAP2
RADIUS Authentication protocol to be used by PAP
PAP EAP-TTLS-PAP - Administrator
Security Radius server EAP-PEAP-MSCHAP2
PAP EAP-TTLS-PAP
RADIUS Timeout in seconds between re-
1 900 2 sec Administrator
Timeout transmission requests
RADIUS
Number of retries before giving up 1 99 10 - Administrator
Retries
RADIUS Shared Secret used in authentication.
1 character 16 characters ChangeMe1# - Administrator
Secret It is only displayed as asterisks.

The data cell RADIUS Status indicates the status of the currently-selected RADIUS server. This will display either
Disabled, Server OK, or Failed.

4.6.10.4 RADIUS ACCOUNTING


RADIUS accounting is not supported by the IED. The user can achieve accounting through syslog (see the SYSLOG
section).

4.6.10.5 RADIUS CLIENT-SERVER VALIDATION


Client-server validation is achieved using a shared secret. The IED must be configured with the RADIUS Secret
setting to match the shared secret configured in the RADIUS server. It is recommended (but not enforced) that this
setting meets the P40 password requirements.

Note:
It is recommended that the shared secret be changed from the default before using Radius authentication.

The IED does not support exchange of CA certificates. The RADIUS server may send a certificate but the IED will not
verify it.

4.6.11 RECOVERY

4.6.11.1 RESTORE TO LOCAL FACTORY DEFAULT


The Restore Defaults setting is available to facilitate NERC CIP compliance requirements for decommissioning
critical cyber devices. Only the Administrator role can change this setting.
The Restore Defaults setting under the CONFIGURATION column is used to restore a setting group to factory
default settings.
0 = No Operation
1 = All Settings
2 = Setting Group 1
3 = Setting Group 2
4 = Setting Group 3

24 P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6
S1 Agile Settings Application Software

5 = Setting Group 4
To restore the default values to the settings in any setting group, set the Restore Defaults setting to the relevant
Group number. Alternatively, it is possible to set the Restore Defaults setting to All Settings to restore the
default values to all the IEDs settings, not only one setting group.

Note:
Restoring defaults to all settings includes the rear communication port settings, which may result in communication via the
rear port being disrupted if the new (default) settings do not match those of the master station.

Data (events, DR, fault records, protection counters etc) is left untouched. When decommissioning critical cyber
IEDs, users may want to clear all data and events as well.

4.6.11.2 PASSWORD RESET PROCEDURE


If you mislay a devices password (if Administrator forgets their password), the passwords can be reset to default
using a recovery password. To obtain the recovery password you must contact the Contact Centre and supply the
Serial Number and the security code. The Contact Centre will use these items to generate a Recovery Password.
The security code is a 16-character string of uppercase characters. It is a read-only parameter. The device
generates its own security code randomly. A new code is generated under the following conditions:
● On power up
● Whenever settings are set back to default
● On expiry of validity timer (see below)
● When the recovery password is entered

This reset procedure can be only accomplished through front panel exclusively and cannot be done over any other
interface. As soon as the security code is displayed on the front panel User Interface, a validity timer is started. This
validity timer is set to 72 hours and is not configurable. This provides enough time for the Contact Centre to
manually generate and send a recovery password. The Service Level Agreement (SLA) for recovery password
generation is one working day, so 72 hours is sufficient time, even allowing for closure of the Contact Centre over
weekends and bank holidays.
The procedure is:
The security code is displayed on confirmation. The validity timer is then started. The security code can only be
read from the front panel.
This reset procedure can be only accomplished through front panel exclusively and cannot be done over the
Ethernet/serial port, but only when physically present in front of the IED. In the event of losing all passwords (if the
Administrator forgets their password) the user could reset the IED to default passwords, following the procedure
below:
1. User navigates to Security Code cell in SECURITY CONFIG column
2. To prevent accidental reading of the IED Security Code, the cell will initially display a warning message:

PRESS ENTER TO
READ SEC. CODE

3. Press Enter to read the Security Code.


4. User sends an email to the Contact Centre providing the full IED serial number and displayed Security Code,
using a recognisable corporate email account
5. Contact Centre emails the user with the Recovery Password. The recovery password is intended for recovery
only. It is not a replacement password that can be used continually. It can only be used once – for password
recovery.

P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6 25
Settings Application Software S1 Agile

6. User logs in with the username ADMINISTRATOR and the recovery password in to the Password setting in
SYSTEM DATA column.
7. Then IED will prompt

RESET PASSWORD?
ENTER or CLEAR

8. Press Enter to continue the reset procedure


9. If the recovery password successfully validates, the default passwords are restored for each access level for
Device authentication.
10. Change Auth. Method setting to Server + Device if applicable.

Note:
Restoring passwords to defaults does not affect any other settings and does not provoke reboot of the IED. The protection and
control functions of the IED are always maintained.

4.6.11.3 ACCESS LEVEL DDBS


The current level of access for each interface is available for use in the Programmable Scheme Logic (PSL) as these
DDB signals:
● HMI Access Lvl 1
● HMI Access Lvl 2
● FPort AccessLvl1
● FPort AccessLvl2
● RPrt1 AccessLvl1
● RPrt1 AccessLvl2
● RPrt2 AccessLvl1
● RPrt2 AccessLvl2

Each pair of DDB signals indicates the access level as follows:


● Level 1 off, Level 2 off = 0
● Level 1 on, Level 2 off = 1
● Level 1 off, Level 2 on = 2
● Level 1 on, Level 2 on = 3

KEY:
HMI = Human Machine Interface
FPort = Front Port
RPrt = Rear Port
Lvl = Level

4.6.12 DISABLING PHYSICAL PORTS


It is possible to disable unused physical ports. A level 3 password is needed to perform this action.
To prevent accidental disabling of a port, a warning message is displayed according to whichever port is required
to be disabled. For example, if rear port 1 is to be disabled, the following message appears:

26 P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6
S1 Agile Settings Application Software

REAR PORT 1 TO BE
DISABLED.CONFIRM

The following ports can be disabled, depending on the model.


● Front port (Front Port setting)
● Rear port 1 (Rear Port 1 setting)
● Rear port 2 (Rear Port 2 setting)
● Ethernet port (Ethernet Port setting)

Note:
It is not possible to disable a port from which the disabling port command originates.
We do not generally advise disabling the physical Ethernet port.

4.6.13 DISABLING LOGICAL PORTS


It is possible to disable unused logical ports. A level 3 password is needed to perform this action.

Note:
The port disabling setting cells are not provided in the settings file. It is only possible to do this using the HMI front panel.

The following protocols can be disabled:


● IEC 61850 (IEC 61850 setting)
● DNP3 Over Ethernet (DNP3 OE setting)--where available
● Courier Tunnelling (Courier Tunnel setting)

Note:
If any of these protocols are enabled or disabled, the Ethernet card will reboot.

4.7 SECURITY EVENT MANAGEMENT


To implement NERC-compliant cyber-security, a range of security events are logged in the Security Event file.

4.7.1 SECURITY EVENTS: COURIER


Event Value Display
USER LOGGED IN
PASSWORD LEVEL UNLOCKED
ON {int} LEVEL {n}
USER LOGGED OUT
PASSWORD LEVEL RESET
ON {int} LEVEL {n}
P/WORD SET BLANK
PASSWORD SET BLANK
BY {int} LEVEL {p}
P/WORD NOT-NERC
PASSWORD SET NON-COMPLIANT
BY {int} LEVEL {p}
PASSWORD CHANGED
PASSWORD MODIFIED
BY {int} LEVEL {p}
PASSWORD BLOCKED
PASSWORD ENTRY BLOCKED
ON {int}

P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6 27
Settings Application Software S1 Agile

Event Value Display


P/WORD UNBLOCKED
PASSWORD ENTRY UNBLOCKED
ON {int}
INV P/W ENTERED
INVALID PASSWORD ENTERED
ON <int}
P/WORD EXPIRED
PASSWORD EXPIRED
ON {int}
P/W ENT WHEN BLK
PASSWORD ENTERED WHILE BLOCKED
ON {int}
RCVY P/W ENTERED
RECOVERY PASSWORD ENTERED
ON {int}
IED SEC CODE RD
IED SECURITY CODE READ
ON {int}
IED SEC CODE EXP
IED SECURITY CODE TIMER EXPIRED
-
PORT DISABLED
PORT DISABLED
BY {int} PORT {prt}
PORT ENABLED
PORT ENABLED
BY {int} PORT {prt}
DEF. DISPLAY NOT NERC COMPLIANT DEF DSP NOT-NERC
PSL STNG D/LOAD
PSL SETTINGS DOWNLOADED
BY {int} GROUP {grp}
DNP STNG D/LOAD
DNP SETTINGS DOWNLOADED
BY {int}
TRACE DAT D/LOAD
TRACE DATA DOWNLOADED
BY {int}
IED CONFG D/LOAD
IEC 61850 CONFIG DOWNLOADED
BY {int}
USER CRV D/LOAD
USER CURVES DOWNLOADED
BY {int} GROUP {crv}
PSL CONFG D/LOAD
PSL CONFIG DOWNLOADED
BY {int} GROUP {grp}
SETTINGS D/LOAD
SETTINGS DOWNLOADED
BY {int} GROUP {grp}
PSL STNG UPLOAD
PSL SETTINGS UPLOADED
BY {int} GROUP {grp}
DNP STNG UPLOAD
DNP SETTINGS UPLOADED
BY {int}
TRACE DAT UPLOAD
TRACE DATA UPLOADED
BY {int}
IED CONFG UPLOAD
IEC 61850 CONFIG UPLOADED
BY {int}
USER CRV UPLOAD
USER CURVES UPLOADED
BY {int} GROUP {crv}
PSL CONFG UPLOAD
PSL CONFIG UPLOADED
BY {int} GROUP {grp}
SETTINGS UPLOAD
SETTINGS UPLOADED
BY {int} GROUP {grp}
EVENTS EXTRACTED
EVENTS HAVE BEEN EXTRACTED
BY {int} {nov} EVNTS

28 P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6
S1 Agile Settings Application Software

Event Value Display


ACTIVE GRP CHNGE
ACTIVE GROUP CHANGED
BY {int} GROUP {grp}
C & S CHANGED
CS SETTINGS CHANGED
BY {int}
DR CHANGED
DR SETTINGS CHANGED
BY {int}
SETTINGS CHANGED
SETTING GROUP CHANGED
BY {int} GROUP {grp}
POWER ON
POWER ON
-
S/W DOWNLOADED
SOFTWARE_DOWNLOADED
-

where:
● int is the interface definition (UI, FP, RP1, RP2, TNL, TCP)
● prt is the port ID (FP, RP1, RP2, TNL, DNP3, IEC, ETHR)
● grp is the group number (1, 2, 3, 4)
● crv is the Curve group number (1, 2, 3, 4)
● n is the new access level (0, 1, 2, 3)
● p is the password level (1, 2, 3)
● nov is the number of events (1 - nnn)

Each new event has an incremented unique number, therefore missing events appear as gap in the sequence. The
unique identifier forms part of the event record that is read or uploaded from the IED.

Note:
It is no longer possible to clear Event, Fault, Maintenance, and Disturbance Records.

4.7.2 SYSLOG
Security events are also logged to a remote syslog server.
All login and logout attempts from local and central authentication, whether successful or failed, are logged. The
contents of each successful or failed, login and logout security event include a specific username.
The security log cannot be cleaned by any of the available roles.
The contents of each login and/or logout security event include the relevant interface. The following interfaces are
supported:
Interface Abbr.
Front Port FP
Rear Port 1 RP1
Rear Port 2 RP2
Ethernet NET
Front Panel UI

P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6 29
Settings Application Software S1 Agile

The following events are available to be logged to the syslog server:


Event Categorisation Severity
Login - Authentication successful Informational (6)
Login - Authentication Failure Informational (6)
Logout Informational (6)
RADIUS Server Unavailable Alert (1)
Session timeout Informational (6)
Account Locked Notice (5)
User accessed while locked Notice (5)
ByPass Activate Notice (5)
ByPass Deactivate Notice (5)
Password Change Notice (5)
Recovery password is entered to reset the passwords Notice (5)
Settings / Configuration Changed Notice (5)
Settings / Configuration uploaded
Notice (5)
(to S1 Agile)
Event Records uploaded Notice (5)
Default settings restored Notice (5)
Notice (5)
Notice (5)
Active Setting Group Changed
Notice (5)
Notice (5)
Notice (5)
Default user curves restored
Notice (5)
Notice (5)

4.7.3 SYSLOG CLIENT


The IED supports security event reporting through the Syslog protocol for supporting Security Information Event
Management (SIEM) systems for centralized cyber security Monitoring over UDP protocol.
The IED is a Syslog client that supports two Syslog servers. The following settings are available in the
COMMUNICATIONS column.
Min.
Setting Name Description Min Max Default Units
Permission
The IP address of the target Syslog
SysLog Pri IP 0.0.0.0 223.255.255.254 0.0.0.0 - Administrator
server (Primary)
The IP address of the target Syslog
SysLog Sec IP 0.0.0.0 223.255.255.254 0.0.0.0 - Administrator
server (Secondary)
The UDP port number of the target
SysLog Port 1 65535 514 - Administrator
Syslog server

4.7.4 SYSLOG FUNCTIONALITY


The P40 supports the RFC 5424 UDP protocol.

30 P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6
S1 Agile Settings Application Software

The table below shows the format of a Syslog event.


Header <PRIVAL>1 YYYY-MM-DDTHH:mm:ss.fffZ IEDName userlog - MSGID
PRIVAL 32 + [event severity]
32 is derived from the facility number 4 (meaning security/authorization messages)
Event severity is derived from the received message.
YYYY 4 Digit year; i.e. 2018
Derived from the received message timestamp.
MM 2 Digit month; 01 to 12 (for January to December).
Derived from the received message timestamp.
DD 2 Digit day of month; 01 to 31 (depending upon the month)
Derived from the received message timestamp.
HH 2 Digit hour of day; 00 to 23
Derived from the received message timestamp.
mm 2 Digit count of minutes elapsed in the current hour; 00 to 59
Derived from the received message timestamp.
ss 2 Digit count of seconds elapsed in the current minute; 00 to 59
Derived from the received message timestamp.
fff 3 Digit fraction of seconds (millisecond resolution); 0 to 999
Derived from the received message timestamp.
IP Addr IP Address assigned to the Ethernet Board.
MSGID Unique message type identity
Derived from the received message event type.
Data [timeQuality tzKnown=X]
(common) X Timezone quality attribute for event timestamp (in header)
0; indicating Local Time offset and DST settings are not enabled (i.e. timestamp is UTC)
Data [gePlatformEvt channel=IFACE accessLevel=AL evtid=UUID extra=EDATA] DETAIL
(Platform IFACE Channel access type
event)
Copied from the received message interface name.
AL Access Level
Copied from the received message access level.
UUID Unique event identification
Copied from the received message unique id.
EDATA Extra event data – meaning of which is specific to the event type (see MSGID in header)
Copied from the received message extra info.
DETAIL Event details.
Derived from the received message event text and value.
Data [geUserInfo channel=IFACE loginId=USER] DETAIL
(Enhanced IFACE Channel access type
event)
Copied from the received message interface name.
USER Logged in username who generated the event
Copied from the received message user id.
DETAIL Event details.
Copied from the received message event text.
Formatted <38>1 2018-02-06T11:46:32.074Z Feeder1 userlog - 5120 [timeQuality tzKnown=0][gePlatformEvt channel=UI
Examples: accessLevel=3 evtid=4 extra=0] User Logged In on UI Level 3User Logged In on UI Level 3
<38>1 2018-02-06T11:46:32.074Z Feeder1 userlog - 9999 [timeQuality tzKnown=0][geUserInfo channel=UI
loginId=user1] Login - Authentication successful

P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6 31
Settings Application Software S1 Agile

Sample Syslog messages are shown below:


Event Access Method Syslog Message (As from Syslog Server)
04-17-2019 14:43:32 Auth.Info 192.168.1.30 1 1994-01-23T21:34:06.102Z 192.168.1.30
Authentication
UI userlog - 9999 [timeQuality tzKnown=0][geUserInfo channel=FP
Successful
loginid=ADMINISTRATOR] Login - Authentication successful
04-19-201913:36:08Auth.Info192.168.1.301 1994-01-25T20:26:42.872Z 192.168.1.30
Authentication
Serial userlog - 9999 [timeQuality tzKnown=0][geUserInfo channel=RP1 loginid=ENGINEER]
Failure
Login - Authentication fail
Courier Tunnel 04-17-201915:29:20Auth.Info192.168.1.301 1994-01-23T22:19:58.168Z 192.168.1.30
Network Login
(device userlog - 9999 [timeQuality tzKnown=0][geUserInfo channel=NET loginid=ENGINEER]
Success
authentication) Login - Authentication successful
04-19-201913:52:08Auth.Info192.168.1.301 1994-01-25T20:42:42.782Z 192.168.1.30
Logout Serial userlog - 9999 [timeQuality tzKnown=0][geUserInfo channel=RP1
loginid=ADMINISTRATOR] Logout
04-18-201912:40:14Auth.Alert192.168.1.301 1994-01-24T19:30:55.839Z 192.168.1.30
RADIUS
FP userlog - 5163 [timeQuality tzKnown=0][gePlatformEvt channel=FP accessLevel=0
Unavailable
evtid=3715 extra=0] RADIUS UnAvailbl
04-18-201912:39:19Auth.Warning192.168.1.301 1994-01-24T19:30:00.573Z
Bypass Activated FP 192.168.1.30 userlog - 9998 [timeQuality tzKnown=0][geUserInfo channel=FP
loginid=ADMINISTRATOR] ByPass Activated
04-18-201911:52:35Auth.Notice192.168.1.301 1994-01-24T18:43:16.537Z 192.168.1.30
Settings modified Courier Tunnel userlog - 5149 [timeQuality tzKnown=0][gePlatformEvt channel=NET accessLevel=3
evtid=3677 extra=0] Settings Upload By TNL

32 P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6
S1 Agile Settings Application Software

5 PSL EDITOR
The Programmable Scheme Logic (PSL) is a module of programmable logic gates and timers in the IED, which can
be used to create customised internal logic. This is done by combining the IED's digital inputs with internally
generated digital signals using logic gates and timers, then mapping the resultant signals to the IED's digital
outputs and LEDs.
The Programmable Scheme Logic (PSL) Editor allows you to create and edit scheme logic diagrams to suit your
own particular application.

5.1 LOADING SCHEMES FROM FILES


The product is shipped with default scheme files. These can be used as a starting point for changes to a scheme.
To create a new blank scheme, select File then New then 'Blank scheme... to open the default file for the
appropriate IED. This deletes the diagram components from the default file to leave an empty diagram but with
the correct configuration information loaded.

5.2 PSL EDITOR TOOLBAR


There are a number of toolbars available to help with navigating and editing the PSL.
Toolbar Description
Standard tools: For file management and printing.

Alignment tools: To snap logic elements into horizontally or vertically


aligned groupings.

Drawing tools : To add text comments and other annotations, for easier
reading of PSL schemes.

Nudge tools: To move logic elements.

Rotation tools: Tools to spin, mirror and flip.

Structure tools: To change the stacking order of logic components.

Zoom and pan tools: For scaling the displayed screen size, viewing the
entire PSL, or zooming to a selection.

5.2.1 LOGIC SYMBOLS


The logic symbol toolbar provides icons to place each type of logic element into the scheme diagram. Not all
elements are available in all devices. Icons are only displayed for elements available in the selected device.

Symbol Function Explanation


Link Create a link between two logic symbols.

Opto Signal Create an opto-input signal.

Input Signal Create an input signal.

P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6 33
Settings Application Software S1 Agile

Symbol Function Explanation


Output Signal Create an output signal.

GOOSE In Create an input signal to logic to receive a GOOSE message transmitted from another IED.
Used in either UCA2.0 or IEC 61850 GOOSE applications only.
GOOSE Out Create an output signal from logic to transmit a GOOSE message to another IED. Used in
either UCA2.0 or IEC 61850 GOOSE applications only.
Control In Create an input signal to logic that can be operated from an external command.

InterMiCOM In Create an input signal to logic to receive an InterMiCOM command transmitted from
another IED.
InterMiCOM Out Create an output signal from logic to transmit an InterMiCOM command to another IED.

Off-page left Create an output Off-page connector for the off page right connector.

Off-page right Create an input Off-page connector to replicate elsewhere in the diagram.

Function Key Create a function key input signal.

Trigger Signal Create a fault record trigger.

LED Signal Create an LED input signal that repeats the status of tri-colour LED.

Contact Signal Create a contact signal.

LED Conditioner Create an LED conditioner.

Contact Conditioner Create a contact conditioner.

Timer Create a timer.

AND Gate Create an AND Gate.

OR Gate Create an OR Gate.

Programmable Gate Create a programmable gate.

Counter Gate that can add pulses to a configurable threshold.

5.3 LOGIC SIGNAL PROPERTIES


1. Use the logic toolbar to select logic signals. This is enabled by default but to hide or show it, select View
then Logic Toolbar.
2. Zoom in or out of a logic diagram using the toolbar icon or select View then Zoom Percent.
3. Right-click any logic signal and a context-sensitive menu appears.
Certain logic elements show the Properties option. If you select this, a Component Properties window appears.
The contents of this window and the signals listed will vary according to the logic symbol selected. The actual DDB
numbers are dependent on the model.

34 P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6
S1 Agile Settings Application Software

5.3.1 LINK PROPERTIES


Links form the logical link between the output of a signal, gate or condition and the input to any element. Any link
connected to the input of a gate can be inverted. To do this:
1. Right-click the input
2. Select Properties…. The Link Properties window appears.
3. Check the box to invert the link. Or uncheck for a non-inverted link
An inverted link is shown with a small circle on the input to a gate. A link must be connected to the input of a gate
to be inverted.
Links can only be started from the output of a signal, gate, or conditioner, and must end at an input to any
element.
Signals can only be an input or an output. To follow the convention for gates and conditioners, input signals are
connected from the left and output signals to the right. The Editor automatically enforces this convention.
A link is refused for the following reasons:
● There has been an attempt to connect to a signal that is already driven. The reason for the refusal may not
be obvious because the signal symbol may appear elsewhere in the diagram. In this case you can right-click
the link and select Highlight to find the other signal. Click anywhere on the diagram to disable the highlight.
● An attempt has been made to repeat a link between two symbols. The reason for the refusal may not be
obvious because the existing link may be represented elsewhere in the diagram.

5.3.2 OPTO SIGNAL PROPERTIES


Input #
DDB #

E02030

Each opto-input can be selected and used for programming in PSL. Activation of the opto-input drives an
associated DDB signal.

5.3.3 INPUT SIGNAL PROPERTIES


NIC Link Fail #
DDB #
E02031

IED logic functions provide logic output signals that can be used for programming in PSL. Depending on the IED
functionality, operation of an active IED function drives an associated DDB signal in PSL.

5.3.4 OUTPUT SIGNAL PROPERTIES


Inhibit VTS
DDB #
E02032

Logic functions provide logic input signals that can be used for programming in PSL. Depending on the
functionality of the output relay, when the output signal is activated, it drives an associated DDB signal in PSL. This
causes an associated response to the function of the output relay.

5.3.5 GOOSE INPUT SIGNAL PROPERTIES


Virtual Input #
DDB #
E02033

P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6 35
Settings Application Software S1 Agile

The Programmable Scheme Logic interfaces with the GOOSE Scheme Logic through 32 Virtual Inputs. The Virtual
Inputs can be used in much the same way as the opto-input signals.
The logic that drives each of the Virtual Inputs is contained in the GOOSE Scheme Logic file. You can map any
number of bit-pairs from any subscribed device using logic gates onto a Virtual Input.

5.3.6 GOOSE OUTPUT SIGNAL PROPERTIES


Virtual Output #
DDB #
E02034

The Programmable Scheme Logic interfaces with the GOOSE Scheme Logic through 32 Virtual Outputs.
You can map Virtual Outputs to bit-pairs for transmitting to any subscribed devices.

5.3.7 CONTROL INPUT SIGNAL PROPERTIES


Control Input #
DDB #
E02035

There are 32 control inputs which can be activated using the menu, the hotkeys or through courier
communications. Depending on the programmed setting that is latched or pulsed, when a control input is
operated an associated DDB signal is activated in PSL.

5.3.8 INTERMICOM INPUT PROPERTIES


IM64 Ch # Input #
DDB #
E02036

There are 16 InterMiCOM inputs that can be used for teleprotection and remote commands. InterMiCOM In is a
signal which is received from the remote end. It can be mapped to a selected output relay or logic input.

IED End B
Clear Statistics
DDB #
E02037

At end B, InterMiCOM Input 1 is mapped to the command Clear Statistics.

5.3.9 INTERMICOM OUTPUT PROPERTIES


IM64 Ch # Output #
DDB #
E02038

There are 16 InterMiCOM outputs that can be used for teleprotection and remote commands. InterMiCOM Out is a
send command to a remote end that can be mapped to any logic output or opto-input. This is transmitted to the
remote end as a corresponding InterMiCOM In command.

IED End A
Clear Stats command
DDB #
E02039

At end A, InterMiCOM Output 1 is mapped to the command indication Clear Statistics issued at end A.

36 P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6
S1 Agile Settings Application Software

5.3.10 FUNCTION KEY PROPERTIES


Function Key #
DDB #
E02040

Each function key can be selected and used for programming in PSL. Activation of the function key drives an
associated DDB signal. The DDB signal remains active according to the programmed setting (toggled or normal).
Toggled mode means the DDB signal remains in the new state until the function key is pressed again. In Normal
mode, the DDB is only active while the key is pressed.

5.3.11 FAULT RECORDER TRIGGER PROPERTIES


Fault REC TRIG
DDB #
E02041

The fault recording facility can be activated by driving the fault recorder trigger DDB signal.

5.3.12 LED SIGNAL PROPERTIES


LED #
DDB #
E02042

All programmable LEDs drive associated DDB signals when the LED is activated.

5.3.13 CONTACT SIGNAL PROPERTIES


Output #
DDB #
E02043

All output relay contacts drive associated DDB signal when the output contact is activated.

5.3.14 LED CONDITIONER PROPERTIES

FnKey LED1 Red Red LED


1 DDB #
Non -
Latching FnKey LEDGm
DDB #

FnKey LED1 Red


Non - DDB #1040
Latching FnKey LEDGm
1 DDB # Green LED

FnKey LED1 Red


Non - DDB #1040
1 Latching FnKey LEDGm
Yellow LED
DDB #

E02044

Figure 5: Examples of how to set Red, Green and Yellow LEDs

P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6 37
Settings Application Software S1 Agile

To set LED conditioner properties,


1. Select the LED name from the list (only shown when inserting a new symbol).
2. Configure the LED output to be Red, Yellow or Green.
3. Configure a Green LED by driving the Green DDB input.
4. Configure a RED LED by driving the RED DDB input.
5. Configure a Yellow LED by driving the RED and GREEN DDB inputs simultaneously.
6. Configure the LED output to be latching or non-latching.

5.3.15 CONTACT CONDITIONER PROPERTIES


Each contact can be conditioned with an associated timer that can be selected for pick up, drop off, dwell, pulse,
pick-up/drop-off, straight-through, or latching operation.
Straight-through means it is not conditioned at all whereas Latching is used to create a sealed-in or lockout type
function.
To set contact properties,
1. Select the contact name from the Contact Name list (only shown when inserting a new symbol).
2. Choose the conditioner type required in the Mode tick list.
3. Set the Pick-up Value (in milliseconds), if required.
4. Set the Drop-off Value (in milliseconds), if required.

5.3.16 COUNTER PROPERTIES


Each PSL counter has an increment (+), a decrement (-) and Reset (R) input and a count output (Q) which goes high
when the count threshold value is exceeded.
To set counter properties,
1. From the Trigger Type tick list, choose either, Rising edge triggered or Falling edge triggered.
2. Set the Trigger threshold value, if required.
3. Set the Invert output tick box, if required.
4. From the Available counters list, choose the counter required. Note: The counter number will auto-
increment when adding counters.
5. Click OK.

Note:
The counter threshold can be set in the menu settings, System Config - Counters 1-16 settings if the CounterSourcePSL
setting = 0000000000000000 for all 16 counters. If the CounterSourcePSL setting = 1111111111111111, all 16 counters can
be set via the counter properties in the PSL.

5.3.17 TIMER PROPERTIES


Each timer can be selected for pick-up, drop-off, dwell, pulse or pick-up/drop-off operation.
To set timer properties,
1. From the Timer Mode tick list, choose the mode.
2. Set the Pick-up Value (in milliseconds), if required.
3. Set the Drop-off Value (in milliseconds), if required.
4. From the Available timers list (not in all products), choose the timer required. Note: The timer number will
auto-increment when adding timers.
5. Click OK.

38 P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6
S1 Agile Settings Application Software

5.3.18 GATE PROPERTIES


A gate can be an AND, OR, or programmable gate.
● An AND Gate requires that all inputs are TRUE for the output to be TRUE.
● An OR Gate requires that one or more input is TRUE for the output to be TRUE.
● A Programmable Gate requires that the number of inputs that are TRUE is equal to or greater than its
Inputs to Trigger setting for the output to be TRUE.

To set gate properties,


1. Select the gate type: AND Gate, OR Gate, or Programmable Gate.
2. If you select Programmable Gate, set the number of Inputs to Trigger.
3. If you want the output of the gate to be inverted, check the Invert Output check box. An inverted output
appears as a "bubble" on the gate output.
4. Click OK.

5.3.19 OFF-PAGE CONNECTOR PROPERTIES


The Scheme Logic Editor Off-page connectors, also known as variables, allows the visual scheme logic to be
displayed without the links breaking over multiple pages. As a result this makes viewing printed schemes much
easier.

E01838

Figure 6: Scheme over 2 pages

E01839

Figure 7: Scheme when printed

P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6 39
Settings Application Software S1 Agile

E01840

Figure 8: Scheme using Off-page connectors

E01841
Figure 9: Scheme with Off-page connectors when printed

5.3.19.1 USING OFF-PAGE CONNECTORS


From version 2.1 onwards the PSL Editor includes two additional connector buttons on the Logic Toolbar. The Off-
Page connector buttons sit in-between the InterMiCOM Out signal and the Control Input signal.

E01842

Figure 10: Off-page connector buttons

The input connector to the Scheme typically appears to the left of the page and the output from the Scheme is to
the right of the page, as shown in the Scheme using Off-page connectors figure.
To add the connectors:
1. Click on the Off-page button then place the component where it is needed. The Off-page connector properties
dialog box will now pop up.
2. The new connector can be assigned from an existing list of Off-page connectors, or given a new name.
3. To add a new name click on the Add new/rename one… button. There is no length restriction but longer names
will overspill the signal shape.
4. The name will now appear in any further Off-page connector additions. Additionally, it will appear in the
Properties dialog when using the Off-page connector menu.

40 P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6
S1 Agile Settings Application Software

E01843

Figure 11: Off-page connector properties

E01844

Figure 12: Subsequent OPC addition

P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6 41
Settings Application Software S1 Agile

5.3.19.2 RULES
When it comes to using Off-page connectors in your schemes there are a few rules to note. They are as follows:
1. There is no limit to the number of Off-page connectors that can be placed on the diagram, other than within
the constraints of the S1 space within the relay file. The S1 file is stored in the relay flash memory and each
Off-page connector occupies only a small amount of space.
2. All OPCs with the same name are logically the same signal so they will be internally ‘wired’ to each other.
3. A connection can only be made from a logical output signal or input OPC to an output OPC.
4. A connection can only be made from an input OPC to a logical input signal or output OPC.
5. An input OPC can be connected to an output OPC. As shown in the Subsequent OPC addition figure above.
6. When the last OPC with a specific name has been deleted from the Scheme, it will not appear in the OPC
Properties list.

E01845
Figure 13: Wiring OPCs together

5.3.19.3 EXAMPLES
The following examples show some valid possible uses of the Off-page connectors.

E01846
Figure 14: Example 1

42 P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6
S1 Agile Settings Application Software

E01847
Figure 15: Example 2

E01848
Figure 16: Example 3

The following examples show some invalid ways of connecting the Off-page connectors.

P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6 43
Settings Application Software S1 Agile

E01849
Figure 17: Example 4

5.3.20 SR PROGRAMMABLE GATE PROPERTIES


A Programmable SR gate can be selected to operate with the following three latch properties:
Q0 (Previous
Set Reset Q1 Set Dominant Q1 Reset Dominant Q1 No Dominance
Output State)
0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 1 1 1 1
0 1 1 0 0 0
0 1 0 0 0 0
1 1 0 1 0 0
1 1 1 1 0 1
1 0 1 1 1 1
1 0 0 1 1 1

Q0 is the previous output state of the latch before the inputs change. Q1 is the output of the latch after the inputs
change.
The Set dominant latch ignores the Reset if the Set is on.
The Reset Dominant latch ignores the Set if the Reset is on.
When both Set and Reset are on, the output of the non-dominant latch depends on its previous output Q0.
Therefore if Set and Reset are energised simultaneously, the output state does not change.

Note:
Use a set or reset dominant latch. Do not use a non-dominant latch unless this type of operation is required.

44 P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6
S1 Agile Settings Application Software

SR latch properties
In the Component Properties dialog, you can select S-R latches as Standard (no input dominant), Set input
dominant or Reset input dominant.
If you want the output to be inverted, check the Invert Output check box. An inverted output appears as a
"bubble" on the gate output.

5.4 PSL CONVERTER


The PSL Converter allows you to import PSL files from products with very slightly different CORTECs such as
protocol support or case size.

5.4.1 PSL CONVERTER PREREQUISITES


The PSL Converter performs the following checks to ensure compatibility between the PSL file to be converted and
the default PSL file of the destination IED.
● The first four characters of the IED number must match.
● The default file of the destination IED must exist.
● Only the configuration of the destination IED’s default file is used.
● The maximum configured number of optos, contacts and LEDs must match.
● Each DDB used in the scheme must be of the same type and source as the default. The actual DDB names
are ignored, so the destination model’s default file can be in any language.
● The number of DDBs in the source and destination files must be the same.

5.4.2 FILE CONVERSION


To convert a PSL file:
1. From the PSL Editor, press Ctrl + Alt + Z simultaneously to launch the PSL Conversion wizard. Keep in mind
the restrictions on PSL conversion.
2. Follow the instructions in the model conversion wizard.

5.5 DDB MONITORING


The status of the DDB signals can be monitored live by using the DDB Monitor Signals feature. This allows the user
to visually confirm the status of all the logic elements during transitions using the diagram as reference, making it
easier and faster to confirm that the designed logic acts as expected.

5.5.1 DDB MONITORING PREREQUISITES


The PSL Editor needs to connect to the IED before monitoring is available. This is an online only feature.
1. First go to Device and select Comms Setup. The program can take up to one minute to display the next
window.
2. Select the correct connection option. If using the P40U converter the COM port should be offered, the
Scheme section will be empty, and the communication parameters will be correct in the landing page, press
OK if that is the case. If connecting using any other means, choose the right option in the Scheme section.
We recommend changing in Transaction Values the Reset Response Time to 1000 ms.
3. Make sure the PSL file that corresponds to what the relay has, is opened. The best way to ensure this is by
sending the file just before testing. On a live relay the preferred option is to use the original PSL file sent,
over a recovered PSL file. Before any monitoring is done make sure there is a match in the CRC calculation
in the relay (found in the PSL DATA menu on the HMI) and the file (located in Tools then Calculate CRC)

P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6 45
Settings Application Software S1 Agile

5.5.2 SETTING THE DDB MONITORING SESSION


To start the DDB monitoring session:
1. From the PSL Editor, select Tools then Monitor DDB Signals.
2. When prompted select the option for Real values. The Demo option is used for tool R&D purposes only and
has no significance for an end user.
3. To begin the first recording session, select the time interval desired for each sample. The lowest value is 0.1
second and this is the fastest speed at which the tool can poll the values of the DDBs. Once chosen select
Start Monitoring.
4. When the monitoring is activated, DDB signals and links with a value of 1 (ON) are shown in red colour. DDB
signals with a value of 0 (OFF) are shown in blue colour. The values of the DDBs will be updated every
selected sample interval.

Note:
The relay will still update the PSL file internally at the same speed, the actual PSL file is calculated a lot faster 0.1 seconds but
it is not possible to record this in the monitoring as it would affect the relay’s performance.

5.5.3 SAVING THE DDB MONITORING SESSION


In most applications, the live monitoring will suffice to verify the integrity of the design of the PSL. However it is
possible to save the recording session and rewatch it for slower analysis or for sharing with someone that wasn’t
present at capture time. To save the monitoring session:
1. Stop the monitoring session if it is still running.
2. On the bottom right corner of the Monitor DDB Signals section select the Save as… button in the DDB
monitor file section.
3. Select a location to store the recording file.

5.5.4 PLAYING THE DDB MONITORING SESSION


To play back a recorded DDB Monitoring session:
1. Open the PSL file that corresponds to the recorded session.
2. From the PSL Editor, select Tools then Monitor DDB Signals.
3. On the bottom right corner of the Monitor DDB Signals section select the Load button in the DDB monitor
file section and locate the recording file.
4. In the Playback section, select the playback interval.

Note:
A PSL can be recorded at a fast speed and played back at a slower speed to allow time for the user to see what changes
happened between samples.

5.6 VIEWING AND PRINTING PSL DIAGRAMS


You can view and print the PSL diagrams for the device. Typically these diagrams allow you to see the following
mappings:
● Opto Input Mappings
● Output Relay Mappings

46 P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6
S1 Agile Settings Application Software

● LED Mappings
● Start Indications
● Phase Trip Mappings
● System Check Mapping

To download the default PSL diagrams for the device and print them:
1. Close the Settings Application Software.
2. Start the Data Model Manager.
3. Click Add then Next.
4. Click Internet then Next.
5. Select your language then click Next.
6. From the tree view, select the model and software version.
7. Click Install. When complete click OK.
8. Close the Data Model Manager and start the Settings Application Software.
9. Select Tools then PSL Editor (Px40).
10. In the PSL Editor select File then New then Default Scheme.
11. Select the IED type
12. Use the advance button to select the software, then select the model number.
13. Highlight the required PSL diagram and select File then Print.

Caution:
Read the notes in the default PSL diagrams, as these provide critical information

P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6 47
Settings Application Software S1 Agile

6 SLD EDITOR
The SLD Configurator enables users to create customized Single Line Diagrams (SLD) for the front panel display.
The SLDs must be configured from the SLD Editor accessible through S1 Agile. It allows the user to have breakers,
switches, metering, and status items on the Single Line Diagrams. The Single Line Diagram can be viewed from the
relay's front panel. The Single Line Diagram page can have a combination of active and passive objects. Status,
metering, and control objects are active while static images for bus, generator, motor, transformer and ground, etc.
are objects. Active objects are the objects which are constantly refreshing with new values. This includes control,
metering and status objects.

6.1 SLD EDITOR IMPLEMENTATION


To start working on an SLD file, download the Data Model of the relay desired which will make the file available for
adding into the S1 system under the relay’s SLD folder. Also, all default SLD files are installed in the Data Model
storage location in the PC when S1 Agile is first installed. SLD files can also be obtained by navigating to the Data
Model location and inspecting the SLD folder under the Courier folder. Once the file has been sent to the relay it
can also be recovered using the extract option in the SLD folder of the relay.
The default file is created with the most common application in mind. However, the SLD Editor can be used for a
full reconfiguration of the SLD diagram to accommodate the user’s needs. The user can redraw the topology to
describe a different application or use it for breaker/switch specific CT/VT placement, metering and status display.
The SLD page is saved as an XML file with .8sld extension. Once the configurable SLD is programmed, it is saved
within the settings file of the relay.

6.2 SLD EDITOR SYMBOLS


The SLD Editor utilises elements and functions on the toolbar. The buttons are:
Select: The select button is used to return to the select pointer regardless of what object is currently selected to be
added to the diagram. Some objects allow users to return to the select tool just by right clicking.
Line: The Line button is used to draw a line in the diagram. In most cases this will be either a horizontal line
describing a section of busbar, or a vertical line connecting two elements. SLDs are normally designed top to
bottom.
VT (GE): Is used to add a VT object with GE visuals to the diagram. Each VT added counts towards the maximum,
independent of the visuals chosen for each one. By double clicking on the VT the Properties menu is shown, or it
can be opened by a right click and selecting Properties. In this menu a 90-degree rotation is allowed for this object
that changes the connection from a vertical position to a horizontal position. Right clicking shows a menu where
you can Copy or Delete the element.
VT (IEC): Is used to add a VT object with IEC visuals to the diagram. Each VT added counts towards the maximum,
independent of the visuals chosen for each one. By double clicking on the VT the Properties menu is shown, or it
can be opened by a right click and selecting Properties. In this menu a 90-degree rotation is allowed for this object
that changes the connection from a vertical position to a horizontal position. Right clicking shows a menu where
you can Copy or Delete the element.
CT (GE): Is used to add a CT object with GE visuals to the diagram. Each CT added counts towards the maximum,
independent of the visuals chosen for each one. By double clicking on the CT the Properties menu is shown, or it
can be opened by a right click and selecting Properties. In this menu you can perform 90-degree rotations from 0
to 270 degrees. Right clicking shows a menu where you can Copy or Delete the element.
CT (IEC): Is used to add a CT object with IEC visuals to the diagram. Each CT added counts towards the maximum,
independent of the visuals chosen for each one. By double clicking on CT the Properties menu is shown, or it can
be opened by a right click and selecting Properties. In this menu you can rotate the object, you can perform 90-
degree rotations from 0 to 270 degrees. Right clicking shows a menu where you can Copy or Delete the element.
Metering Object: Is used to add a Metering value to the diagram. By double clicking on the metered value the
Properties menu is shown, or it can be opened by a right click and selecting Properties. The Parameter section

48 P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6
S1 Agile Settings Application Software

provides a drop-down menu with all the possible metered values that can be displayed. The label section is used to
rename the metered value to a more friendly name. Text colour, background colour and font size are used to
change the look and feel of the metered value on the screen. Right clicking shows a menu where you can Copy or
Delete the element.
Status Object: Is used to add a Status Object to the diagram, the status object is composed of two elements, a text
element and a graphical element. By double clicking on the status object’s text element or the graphical element
the Properties menu is shown, or it can be opened by a right click and selecting Properties. The Parameter section
provides a drop-down menu with all the possible status objects supported. The label section is used to rename the
status object to a more friendly name. Text colour, background colour and font size are used to change the look
and feel of the status object in the screen. The colour of the graphical element is not editable. Right clicking either
shows a menu where you can Copy or Delete the element. The position of both elements is independent.
Text Object: Is used to add a Text Object to the diagram, it is simple text not tied to any specific functionality. By
double clicking on the text object the Properties menu is shown, or it can be opened by a right click and selecting
Properties. The label section is used to rename the Text Object to a more friendly name. Text colour, background
colour and font size are used to change the look and feel of the Text Object on the screen. Right clicking shows a
menu where you can Copy or Delete the element.
Control Objects: The control objects consist of selectable breakers and disconnect switches. The table shows the
different symbols in GE’s Standard style and IEC style. If the switching element is tagged, blocked, or bypassed,
indicators with letters "T", "B", and "By" appear on the lower right corner of the element. Additionally, the breaker/
switch name is displayed at the top of the object.
Symbols
Component
GE IEC
BKR Open

BKR Closed

BKR Bad Status


Breaker

BKR Tagged (T)


/Blocked (B)
/Bypassed (By)

SW Open

SW Closed

SW Unknown Status

Disconnect Switch
SW Intermediate

SW Tagged (T)
/Blocked (B)
/Bypassed (By)

Breaker (GE): Is used to add a breaker with GE visuals to the diagram. Each breaker added counts towards the
maximum, independent of the visuals chosen for each one. By double clicking on the breaker or the text of the

P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6 49
Settings Application Software S1 Agile

breaker the Properties menu is shown, or it can be opened by a right click and selecting Properties. In this menu a
90-degree rotation is used for this object that changes the connection from a vertical position to a horizontal
position. The Selected Breaker drop down menu is used to reassign the breaker in the diagram from the breakers
supported by the relay. The name of the breaker is not editable. The Color scheme setting is used to change from
the green colour to the red colour. This setting is globally shared by all breakers and switches. Right clicking shows
a menu where you can Copy or Delete the element.
Breaker (IEC): Is used to add a Breaker with IEC visuals to the diagram. Each breaker added counts towards the
maximum, independent of the visuals chosen for each one. By double clicking on the Breaker or the text of the
breaker the Properties menu is shown, or it can be opened by a right click and selecting Properties. In this menu a
90-degree rotation is used for this object that changes the connection from a vertical position to a horizontal
position. The Selected Breaker drop down menu is used to reassign the breaker in the diagram from the breakers
supported by the relay. The name of the Breaker is not editable. The Color scheme setting is used to change from
the green colour to the red colour. This setting is globally shared by all breakers and switches. Right clicking shows
a menu where you can Copy or Delete the element.
Disconnect Switch (GE): Is used to add a disconnect switch with GE visuals to the diagram. Each disconnect switch
added counts towards the maximum, independent of the visuals chosen for each one. By double clicking on the
switch or the text of the switch the Properties menu is shown, or it can be opened by a right click and selecting
Properties. In this menu you can perform 90-degree rotations from 0 to 270 degrees. The Selected Disconnect
Switch drop down menu is used to reassign the switch in the diagram from the switches supported by the relay.
The name of the switch is not editable. The Color scheme setting to change from the green colour to red colour.
This setting is globally shared by all breakers and switches. Right clicking shows a menu where you can Copy or
Delete the element.
Disconnect Switch (IEC): Is used to add a Disconnect Switch with IEC visuals to the diagram. Each disconnect
switch added counts towards the maximum, independent of the visuals chosen for each one. By double clicking on
the switch or the text of the switch the Properties menu is shown, or it can be opened by a right click and selecting
Properties. In this menu you can perform 90-degree rotations from 0 to 270 degrees. The Selected Disconnect
Switch drop down menu is used to reassign the switch in the diagram from the switches supported by the relay.
The name of the switch is not editable. This setting is globally shared by all breakers and switches. Right clicking
shows a menu where you can Copy or Delete the element.
Transformer 2W (GE): Is used to add a transformer with two windings with GE visuals to the diagram. Each
transformer with two windings added counts towards the maximum, independent of the visuals chosen for each
one. By double clicking on the transformer the Properties menu is shown, or it can be opened by a right click and
selecting Properties. In this menu a 90-degree rotation is used for this object that changes the connection from a
vertical position to a horizontal position. Right clicking shows a menu where you can Copy or Delete the element.
Transformer 3W (GE): Is used to add a transformer with three windings with GE visuals to the diagram. Each
transformer with three windings added counts towards the maximum, independent of the visuals chosen for each
one. By double clicking on the transformer the Properties menu is shown, or it can be opened by a right click and
selecting Properties. In this menu you can perform 90-degree rotations from 0 to 270 degrees. Right clicking shows
a menu where you can Copy or Delete the element.
Transformer 2W (IEC): Is used to add a transformer with two windings with IEC visuals to the diagram. Each
transformer with two windings added counts towards the maximum, independent of the visuals chosen for each
one. By double clicking on the transformer the Properties menu is shown, or it can be opened by a right click and
selecting Properties. In this menu a 90-degree rotation is used for this object that changes the connection from a
vertical position to a horizontal position. Right clicking shows a menu where you can Copy or Delete the element.
Transformer 3W (IEC): Is used to add a transformer with three windings with IEC visuals to the diagram. Each
transformer with two windings added counts towards the maximum, independent of the visuals chosen for each
one. By double clicking on the transformer the Properties menu is shown, or it can be opened by a right click and
selecting Properties. In this menu you can perform 90-degree rotations from 0 to 270 degrees. Right clicking shows
a menu where you can Copy or Delete the element.
Generator: Is used to add a Generator element to the diagram. This element is cosmetic and aims to help
visualisation of the SLD.

50 P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6
S1 Agile Settings Application Software

Motor: Is used to add a Motor element to the diagram. This element is cosmetic and aims to help visualisation of
the SLD.
Reactor (for grounding): Is used to add a reactor for grounding to the diagram. By double clicking on the reactor
the Properties menu is shown, or it can be opened by a right click and selecting Properties. In this menu a 90-
degree rotation is used for this object that changes the connection from a vertical position to a horizontal position.
Right clicking shows a menu where you can Copy or Delete the element.
Resistor (for grounding): Is used to add a resistor for grounding to the diagram. By double clicking on the resistor
the Properties menu is shown, or it can be opened by a right click and selecting Properties. In this menu a 90-
degree rotation is used for this object that changes the connection from a vertical position to a horizontal position.
Right clicking shows a menu where you can Copy or Delete the element.
Capacitor (polarity): Is used to add a capacitor with polarity to the diagram. By double clicking on the capacitor
the Properties menu is shown, or it can be opened by a right click and selecting Properties. In this menu you can
perform 90-degree rotations from 0 to 270 degrees. Right clicking shows a menu where you can Copy or Delete
the element.
Capacitor (non-polarity): Is used to add a capacitor with no polarity to the diagram. By double clicking on the
capacitor the Properties menu is shown, or it can be opened by a right click and selecting Properties. In this menu
a 90-degree rotation is used for this object that changes the connection from a vertical position to a horizontal
position. Right clicking shows a menu where you can Copy or Delete the element.
Ground: Is used to add a ground element to the diagram. By double clicking on the ground element the Properties
menu is shown, or it can be opened by a right click and selecting Properties. In this menu you can perform 90-
degree rotations from 0 to 270 degrees. Right clicking shows a menu where you can Copy or Delete the element.
Load: Is used to add a load element to the diagram. By double clicking on the load element the Properties menu is
shown, or it can be opened by a right click and selecting Properties. In this menu you can perform 90-degree
rotations from 0 to 270 degrees. Right clicking shows a menu where you can Copy or Delete the element.

Navigation
The Single Line Diagram can be accessed from the front panel of the relay. In the main menu of the relay, navigate
to the Single Line Diagram Menu to enter the Single Line Diagram selection screen. The available Single Line
Diagram will be shown. Select the Single Line Diagram to visualize it. Navigation can be restricted in different ways
depending on the cybersecurity access level granted to the user.

Control Operations
Opening/Starting and Closing/Stopping operations can be carried out by pressing the Open/Start and Close/Stop
pushbuttons on the relay’s front panel. Other operations such as tagging, blocking and bypassing can be carried
out by pressing the control pushbuttons that appear after the control object selection.
Once the selected breaker or switch is tagged, a letter "T" appears below the associated element. Similarly, for
blocking, letter "B" appears and for bypassing, letters "By" appear below the associated breaker or switch as
shown in the last column of the following table. The blocking and bypassing letters also appear if the breakers/
switches are blocked or bypassed remotely. A remotely blocked breaker can be unblocked locally and vice versa.
These are linked to their respective breaker/switch in the SLD Configurator window so that when that breaker/
switch is deleted, the letters also get deleted.
Permitted breaker/switch operations are described in the following table below when various letter indications are
present under the control element.

P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6 51
Settings Application Software S1 Agile

Breaker/Switch Position Letter Indication Operation Sample Indication

Open B Closing is blocked.

Closed B Opening is blocked.

Open B By Closing is blocked but bypassing is allowed.


Closing is permitted.
Closed B By Opening is blocked but bypassing is allowed.
Opening is permitted.
Open or Closed T Tagged by operator. No operation allowed.
Open or Closed T By Tagged by operator. No operation allowed.
Open or Closed T B By Tagged by operator. No operation allowed.

52 P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6
S1 Agile Settings Application Software

7 IED CONFIGURATOR
IEC 61850 is a substation communications standard. It standardizes the way data is transferred to and from IEC
61850 compliant IEDs, making the communication independent of the manufacturer. This makes it easier to
connect different manufacturers’ products together and simplifies wiring and network changes.
The IED Configurator tool is used to configure the IEC 61850 settings of MiCOM IEDs, not the protection settings. It
also allows you to extract a configuration file so you can view, check and modify the IEC 61850 settings during
precommissioning.

7.1 IED CONFIGURATOR TOOL FEATURES


The IED configurator allows you to:
● Select and check IEC 61850 Edition 1 or Edition 2.
● Configure basic IEC 61850 communication parameters of the IED.
● Configure IED time synchronisation using SNTP.
● Edit Logical Devices and Logical Nodes.
● Define datasets for inclusion in report and GOOSE control blocks.
● Configure GOOSE control blocks for publishing (outgoing) messages.
● Configure virtual inputs, mapping them onto subscribed (incoming) GOOSE messages.
● Configure report control blocks.
● Configure the operation of control objects (circuit breaker trip and close):
○ The control mode (such as Direct, Select Before Operate)
○ Uniqueness of control (to ensure only one control in the system can operate at any one time).
● Configure measurements:
○ Scaling (multiplier unit such as kA, MV).
○ Range (minimum and maximum measurement values).
○ Deadband (percentage change of measurement range for reporting).
● Transfer IEC 61850 configuration information to and from an IED.
● Import SCL files for any IEC 61850 device (including devices from other manufacturers) to simplify
configuration of GOOSE messaging between IEDs.
● Generate SCL files to provide IED configuration data to other manufacturers' tools, allowing them to use
published GOOSE Messages and reports.

7.2 IEC 61850 SUBSTATION CONFIGURATION LANGUAGES


The following languages are used.

MiCOM Configuration Language (MCL)


This is a proprietary language file which contains a MiCOM device's IEC 61850 configuration information. This file is
used for transferring data to or from a MiCOM IED.

Substation Configuration Language (SCL)


This is an XML-based standard language used to configure IEC 61850 IEDs in substations. It allows common
substation files to be exchanged between all devices and between different manufacturers' toolsets. This helps to
reduce inconsistencies in system configurations. Users can specify and provide their own SCL files to ensure that
IEDs are configured according to their requirements.
SCL also allows IEC 61850 applications to be configured off-line without needing a network connection to the IED.
Off-line system development tools can be used to generate the files needed for IED configuration automatically

P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6 53
Settings Application Software S1 Agile

from the power system design. This significantly reduces the cost of IED configuration by eliminating most of the
manual configuration tasks.
SCL specifies a hierarchy of configuration files, which enable the various levels of the system to be described: SSD,
SCD, ICD, CID and IID files.

7.3 IEC 61850 SUBSTATION CONFIGURATION FILES


These files all use the standard Substation Configuration Language (SCL). They have the same construction but
differ depending on the application.

System Specification Description (SSD)


This contains the complete specification of a substation automation system including a single line diagram for the
substation and its functionalities, or logical nodes. The SSD contains SCD and ICD files.

Substation Configuration Description (SCD)


This contains information about the substation, all IEDs, data types and communications configuration. When
engineering a system from the top down, an SCD file is produced and imported into the IED Configurator. To ensure
consistency with the configuration of other IEDs in the system, this SCD file normally should not be edited. If there
is no SCD file available, and you need to manually configure a MiCOM IED for precommissioning tests, you can
open an ICD file and edit this to suit the IED application. The ICD file can be preinstalled as a template in the IED
Configurator and opened directly, or it can be provided separately.

IED Capability Description file (ICD)


This describes the IED's capabilities, including information on its data model (Logical Devices or Logical Node
instances) and GOOSE support. The IEC 61850 Configurator can be used before commissioning an IED to create a
blank configuration ICD file. The IEC 61850 Configurator can also extract an ICD file for viewing or modification and
error checking a MiCOM IED.

Configured IED Description File (CID) or Instantiated IED Description File (IID)
This describes a single IED in the system, including communications parameters.

54 P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6
S1 Agile Settings Application Software

IED capabilities System specification


(LN, DO, (Single line, LNs,
IED System
Database configurator
ICD Associations,
relation to single
SCD line, preconfigured
reports, ...
Engineering IED
workplace configurator
Project
engineering
File transfer
environment
Remote
CID
Substation
Automation File transfer Substation File transfers and parameterisation
system Local gateway with IEC 61850 services

IEDs
C C C

V01805

Figure 18: IEC 61850 project configuration

7.4 OPENING A PRECONFIGURED SCL FILE


An SCL configuration file contains the information for the MiCOM IED that is to be configured. To open an SCL
configuration file for the system
1. Select File then Import SCL. A search dialog box appears.
2. Select the required SCL file and click Open.
3. The SCL Explorer window appears, showing an icon for each IED present in the SCL file.
IEDs which can be configured using the IEC 61850 Configurator are shown in a bold typeface and an icon with a
green tick.
IEDs which cannot be configured using the IEC 61850 Configurator are shown with greyed text and an icon with a
red X.
The left hand side of the window shows information on the SCL file and any selected IED tasks that can be
performed on the selected IED(s). Alternatively right-click an IED to list tasks that can be performed on that
particular IED.

7.5 OPENING AN ICD TEMPLATE FILE


If there is no SCD configuration file available, open an ICD template file for the MiCOM IED type that is to be
configured. Once the ICD template is successfully loaded you can then look for all the IEDs that are connected.
1. Select File then New. The Select Template window appears.
2. To select the template, enter the IED model number or select the product group. The lower pane shows
information about the IED's associated ICD template file, the SCL header details and the IEC 61850 features
supported by the IED.

P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6 55
Settings Application Software S1 Agile

7.5.1 TEMPLATE INSTALLED FOR REQUIRED IED TYPE


The ICD files for IED types whose data model has been downloaded using Data Model Manager will be available.
Highlight the desired one and click the Select button. The configuration opens in manual editing mode so it can be
customised for the application.

7.5.2 TEMPLATE NOT INSTALLED FOR REQUIRED IED TYPE


1. If there is no installed ICD file for the IED type that is to be configured, but there is one available from your
supplier, click Browse for External.
2. A search dialog box appears. When you have found the required ICD file, click Open.
3. If the selected ICD Template file is already available as an installed template, a message appears and a new
IED Configuration is created from the installed file.
4. If the selected ICD Template file has additional supported model numbers, a message appears asking if the
additional model numbers should be merged into the installed template.
5. Select Yes to merge the new model numbers into the installed ICD Template file. This makes it available the
next time the Template window appears.
6. If the selected ICD Template file is not installed, a message asks if it should be added to the application
template library.
7. Select Yes to copy the selected ICD template file into the application library. This makes it available the next
time the Template window appears.

7.6 OPENING AN EXISTING MCL CONFIGURATION FILE


1. Select File then Open. A search dialog box appears.
2. Select the required MCL file and click Open.
3. The tool tries to automatically match the MCL data to an installed ICD Template file and then display the
configuration data in a read-only mode.
4. If it cannot automatically match the MCL data to an ICD Template file, the Template window appears. This
allows you to manually assign the MCL data to an ICD Template file. If there is no suitable template
available, click Cancel.
5. A message asks if the configuration is to be opened with Restricted Editing. Select Yes to display the
configuration data in a read-only mode.

7.7 CONFIGURING A MICOM IED


Working offline:
1. Select File then New.
The Select Template window appears. This allows you to create a new IED configuration from an installed
ICD file.
2. Enter the IED model number or select the product group. The lower pane shows information about the IED's
associated ICD template file, the SCL header details and the IEC 61850 features supported by the IED.
Or working online:
1. Select Device then Manage IED.
2. Select the IED type and click Next.
3. Select the IED address and click Next. The IEC 61850 Configurator tool reads information from the IED and
shows them in the Summary view.

Note:
This option is disabled by default in the tool, but can be made available in the main S1 window by removing the /
nocommunication argument found in the Editors menu under Options > Preferences in the tool bar

56 P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6
S1 Agile Settings Application Software

Then:
Double click TEMPLATE in the left-hand pane to expand the tree structure.
The aspects of a MiCOM IED that can be configured come from its ICD Template file. These are shown in the main
area of the IED Configurator tool, in the left hand side of the Editor window. The right hand side of the Editor
window shows the configuration page of the selected category.
Each configurable item of the MiCOM IED is categorised into one of the following groups in the Editor window.
IED Details Displays general configuration and data about the IED and the selected ICD template file.
Communications Displays configuration of the communications Subnetwork.
SNTP Displays configuration of the client/server SNTP time synchronisation.
Dataset Definitions Displays dataset definitions used by the IED's GOOSE and report control blocks.
GOOSE Publishing Displays configuration for the GOOSE control blocks and associated messages to be published.
GOOSE Subscribing Displays configuration of virtual inputs that are subscribed to published GOOSE messages.
Report Control Blocks Displays configuration for the report control blocks in the IED data model.
Controls Displays configuration of control objects and uniqueness of control parameters (for larger control
systems).
Measurements Displays configuration of measurement objects in the IED data model.
Configurable Data Attributes Displays parameter values for the configurable data attributes in the IED data
model.
Each configurable item is either read-only or editable in manual mode. If it is read-only it is always non-editable. If
it is editable in manual mode, some items may not be configurable if opened from a configured SCL file.
If a configured SCL file or MCL file was opened, and it is necessary to edit the configuration, select View then Enter
Manual Editing Mode or click the toolbar icon. If an ICD file is opened, these items are automatically displayed in
manual editing mode.

7.7.1 READING OR EDITING IED DETAILS


Working offline:
Select File then New. The Select Template window appears.
To select the template, enter the IED model number or select the product group. The lower pane shows
information about the IED's associated ICD template file, the SCL header details and the IEC 61850 features
supported by the IED.
If you can find the IED type or ICD template, click Select.
If there is no installed ICD file for the IED but there is one from your supplier, click Browse for External.
Or working online:
1. Select Device then Manage IED.
2. Select the IED type device number.
3. Select the IED address and click Next. The IED Configurator tool reads information from the IED and shows
them in the Summary view.
Then:
1. Double click TEMPLATE in the left-hand pane to expand the tree structure.
2. Click the IED Details item to show more information and edit the settings.
The following IED details can be viewed/edited.
SCL File ID The identification name, taken from the header section of an SCL file. Editable in Manual Editing Mode.

P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6 57
Settings Application Software S1 Agile

SCL File Version The version number, taken from the header section of an SCL file. Editable in Manual Editing
Mode.
Name The IED name, taken from the IED section of an SCL file. This should be unique for all IEDs on the IEC 61850
network and is an Object Reference type so can be up to 65 characters long. However, we recommend that you
restrict IED names to 8 characters or less. Editable in Manual Editing Mode.
ICD Template The ICD Template filename associated with the device's IEC 61850 configuration (MCL data). Read-
only.
SCL Schema Version The SCL Schema version number. Read-only.
IEC 61850 Edition The IEC 61850 Edition number, indicates whether the device supports IEC 61850 Edition 1 or
Edition 2. Read-only.
Description A basic description of the MiCOM IED type. It is taken from the IED section of the ICD template file and
is not stored in MCL data or sent to the MiCOM IED. Read-only.
Type The MiCOM IED type. It is taken from the IED section of the ICD template file and is not stored in MCL data or
sent to the MiCOM IED. Read-only.
Configuration Revision The software version of the target MiCOM IED. It is taken from the IED section of the ICD
template file and is not stored in MCL data or sent to the MiCOM IED. Read-only.
Supported Models The specific MiCOM IED models supported by the ICD template file. If an ICD file is opened,
these models are supported directly. If a configured SCL file is opened, these models are derived from the ICD file
which is used to create a configured SCL file. It is not stored in MCL data nor sent to the MiCOM IED. Read-only.
Functional Naming allows the user to rename certain Logical Nodes and the new name would be visible to any
IEC 61850 external party. This feature is only supported on IEC 61850 Edition 2 Px4x Modular relays. The name
chosen for each Logical Node overwrites the default name given to it by the manufacturer. If using Functional
Naming, all Logical Node name fields need to be filled before the change can be implemented. Logical Nodes that
need no change need to have the default name written in the section provided. Functional Naming does not
change the Logical Node name in the IED Configurator view, the change is only for external tools.

7.7.2 COMMUNICATIONS SETUP


Before the IED Configurator tool can manage an IED's configuration, you must first configure the communication
parameters.
Select Tools then Options, then select the tab according to the protocol used.
IEC 870-5-103 Communications tab. Communication is through a serial connection from a COM port of the PC to
the front port of the IED. If supported by the IED, you can also use the rear port. The Ethernet connection is not
used, because the MiCOM IED does not have an IP address until it has been configured. This is also used for Px30
products.
Courier Communications tab. Communication is through a serial connection from a COM port of the PC to the
front port of the IED. If supported by the IED, you can also use the rear port. The Ethernet connection is not used,
because the MiCOM IED does not have an IP address until it has been configured. This is typically used for Px40
products.
1. In the Default Configurations field, if using the front port, select MiCOM P*40 Front Port (COM *), if using
the rear port, select Courier (COM *).
2. Set the Connection Values and Transaction Parameters as required or leave them at the default values.
3. Click OK.
FTP communications tab. Communication is over Ethernet to the FTP server of a MiCOM IED. The IP Address
settings for both the PC and MiCOM IED must be for the same SubNetwork, especially if a direct connection is used
with a cross-over network lead. If there is no valid or active IEC 61850 configuration in the IED, configure a default
IP Address for the IED. This is also used for Mx70 products.

58 P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6
S1 Agile Settings Application Software

7.7.3 EDITING COMMUNICATIONS SETTINGS


Working offline:
1. Select File then New. The Select Template window appears.
2. Enter the IED model number or select the product group. The lower pane shows information about the IED's
associated ICD template file, the SCL header details and the IEC 61850 features supported by the IED.
3. If you can find the IED type or ICD template, click Select.
If there is no installed ICD file for the IED but there is one from your supplier, click Browse for External.
Or working online:
1. Select Device then Manage IED.
2. Select the IED type device number.
3. Select the IED address and click Next. The IED Configurator tool reads information from the IED and shows
them in the Summary view.
Then:
1. Double click TEMPLATE in the left-hand pane to expand the tree structure.
2. Click the Communications item to read and edit the settings.
The following communications settings can be edited.
Connected Subnetwork This is the subnetwork name to which the IED is connected. It is particularly important for
subscribing to GOOSE messages because an IED can only subscribe to publishers that are connected to the same
subnetwork. The subnetwork name is taken from the Communications section of an SCL file. Normally editable in
Manual Editing Mode, except if opened from a configured SCL file.
Access Point The Access Point (physical port) name for the MiCOM IED. This is taken from the IED Access Point
section of the ICD template file. It is not stored in MCL data or sent to the MiCOM IED. Read-only.
IP Address Used to configure the unique network IP address of the MiCOM IED. It is taken from the ConnectedAP
Address section of the configured SCL file. Editable in Manual Editing Mode.
SubNet Mask Used to configure the IP subnet mask for the network to which the MiCOM IED will be connected. It is
taken from the ConnectedAP Address section of the configured SCL file. Editable in Manual Editing Mode.
Gateway Address Used to configure the IP address of any gateway (proxy) device, to which the MiCOM IED is
connected. It is taken from the ConnectedAP Address section of the configured SCL file.
If there is no gateway (proxy) in the system, leave this at its default unconfigured value of 0.0.0.0. Editable in
Manual Editing Mode.
Ethernet Failover This setting only applies to Single Ethernet Cards with 6/A/B in the Hardware Options section of
the Cortec. The setting allows you to define how long the main connection needs to be down before the backup
link is activated. The minimum value is 2 seconds. For cards with R/S/T in the Hardware Options section of the
Cortec the Failover setting is performed in the Redundant Ethernet Configurator. This is explained in the Redundant
Ethernet Board Manual.
Media This defines the default interface used to communicate between clients and peers, and the MiCOM IED. The
value is taken from the ConnectedAP/PhysConn section of the configured SCL file and is editable in Manual Editing
Mode. The single Ethernet board has one fibre and one copper interface, and it is normally identified with digits
6/A/B in the Hardware Options section of the Cortec. If you are using fibre, select Single Fibre. If you are using
copper, select Single Copper or Redundant (Fibre or Copper). If you are using a Redundant Ethernet board,
normally identified with digits G/H/J/K/L/M/N/P/R/S/T in the Hardware Options section of the Cortec, select Single
Copper or Redundant (Fibre or Copper).
TCP Keepalive Used to set the frequency at which the MiCOM IED sends a TCP Keepalive message to keep open an
association with a connected client. This setting is not taken from SCL. It is specific to MCL with a setting range of 1
to 20 seconds. Editable in Manual Editing Mode.
Database Lock Timeout Used to set how long the MiCOM IED waits without receiving any messages on the active
link before it reverts to its default state. This includes resetting any password access that was enabled. It is taken

P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6 59
Settings Application Software S1 Agile

from the IED/AccessPoint/Server section of the configured SCL file and has a valid setting range of 60 to 1800
seconds (1 to 30 minutes). Only applicable to MiCOM IEDs that support setting changes over IEC 61850. Editable in
Manual Editing Mode.

7.7.4 ETHERNET FAILOVER SETTINGS


Working offline:
1. Select File then New.
The Select Template window appears. This allows you to create a new IED configuration from an installed
ICD file.
2. To select the template, enter the IED model number or select the product group. The lower pane shows
information about the IED's associated ICD template file, the SCL header details and the IEC 61850 features
supported by the IED.
3. If you can find the IED type or ICD template, click Select.
If there is no installed ICD file for the IED but there is one from your supplier, click Browse for External.
Or working online:
1. Select Device then Manage IED.
2. Select the IED type device number and click Next.
3. Select the IED address and click Next. The IED Configurator tool reads information from the IED and shows
them in the Summary view.
Then:
1. Double click TEMPLATE in the left-hand pane to expand the tree structure.
2. Click the Communications item to read and edit the settings.
3. The Media setting defines the default interface used to communicate between clients and peers, and the
MiCOM IED. The value is taken from the ConnectedAP/PhysConn section of the configured SCL file and is
editable in Manual Editing Mode.
The single Ethernet board has one fibre and one copper interface:
If you are using fibre, select Single Fibre.
If you are using copper, select Single Copper or Redundant (Fibre or Copper).
If you are using a Redundant Ethernet board, select Single Copper or Redundant (Fibre or Copper).
4. Set the Ethernet Failover to Enable and adjust the Failover Timeout as required. This does not appear if
the product does not have Ethernet Failover.
5. Select File then Save.

7.7.5 CONFIGURING THE IED FOR SNTP


These settings allow you to configure a MiCOM IED for SNTP.
Working offline:
1. Select File then New. The Select Template window appears.
2. Enter the IED model number or select the product group. The lower pane shows information about the IED's
associated ICD template file, the SCL header details and the IEC 61850 features supported by the IED.
3. If you can find the IED type or ICD template, click Select.
If there is no installed ICD file for the IED but there is one from your supplier, click Browse for External.
Or working online:
1. Select Device then Manage IED.
2. Select the IED type device number.
3. Select the IED address and click Next. The IED Configurator tool reads information from the IED and shows
them in the Summary view.

60 P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6
S1 Agile Settings Application Software

Then:
1. Double click TEMPLATE in the left-hand pane to expand the tree structure.
2. Click the SNTP item, expand it and select General Config (configuring the IED for SNTP).
The following settings can be edited.
Poll Rate Use this to configure the interval at which the MiCOM IED requests time synchronisation from the
selected SNTP server(s). This setting is not taken from SCL. It is specific to MCL with a setting range of 64 to 1024
seconds and is editable in Manual Editing Mode.
Accepted Stratum level SNTP uses a hierarchical system of clock sources. Each level is known as a stratum and is
assigned a layer number starting with zero at the top, which is the reference time signal. The Accepted Stratum
level setting specifies the stratum range for all configured SNTP servers. It defines the range MiCOM IEDs need to
be able to accept time synchronisation responses. Any server response outside the specified range is discarded.
You cannot edit this setting.
Time server This configures whether or not the IED acts as a time server in the system. If this option is enabled,
other devices can synchronise their clocks to this IED. The value for this setting is taken from the IED/AccessPoint
section of the configured SCL file. This setting is editable in Manual Editing Mode.

7.7.6 CONFIGURING THE SNTP SERVER


These settings allow you to configure external SNTP time servers with which the IED tries to synchronize its clock
and connect.
Working offline:
1. Select File then New. The Select Template window appears.
2. Enter the IED model number or select the product group. The lower pane shows information about the IED's
associated ICD template file, the SCL header details and the IEC 61850 features supported by the IED.
3. If you can find the IED type or ICD template, click Select.
If there is no installed ICD file for the IED but there is one from your supplier, click Browse for External.
Or working online:
1. Select Device then Manage IED.
2. Select the IED type device number.
3. Select the IED address and click Next. The IED Configurator tool reads information from the IED and shows
them in the Summary view.
Then:
1. Double click TEMPLATE in the left-hand pane to expand the tree structure.
2. Click the SNTP item, expand it and select External Server (configuring external SNTP time servers to which
the IED connects).
The following details can be edited.
Server Name If opened from a configured SCL file, this shows the name of the device with which the MiCOM IED
attempts to synchronise its clock. If you need to change the device, click the drop-down list to see all time-server
devices in the configured SCL file. This is Read-only, is not stored in MCL data and is not sent to the MiCOM IED.
Access Point If opened from a configured SCL file, this shows the connected Access Point of the device with which
the MiCOM IED attempts to synchronise its clock. This is Read-only, is not stored in MCL data and is not sent to the
MiCOM IED.
Sub Network Name If opened from a configured SCL file, this shows the Sub Network name with which the device
is connected. This is Read-only, is not stored in MCL data and is not sent to the MiCOM IED.
IP Address This is the IP Address of the device that provides SNTP Time synchronisation services. Devices are
assigned to SNTP servers based on the contents of a configured SCL file. The IED/Access Point section of the SCL fil
lists devices supporting SNTP time synchronisation. This setting is editable in Manual Editing Mode.

P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6 61
Settings Application Software S1 Agile

Use Anycast button This button automatically sets the SNTP Server IP address to the broadcast address of the
Sub Network to which the MiCOM IED is connected. Using the SubNet broadcast address forces the IED to use the
Anycast SNTP Mode of operation. This button is only enabled when the IED has a valid IP Address and SubNet
Mask. This setting is editable in Manual Editing Mode.

7.7.7 EDITING DATASET DEFINITIONS


To edit a dataset definition, working offline:
1. Select File then New. The Select Template window appears.
2. To select the template, enter the IED model number or select the product group. The lower pane shows
information about the IED's associated ICD template file, the SCL header details and the IEC 61850 features
supported by the IED.
3. If you can find the IED type or ICD template, click Select.
If there is no installed ICD file for the IED but there is one from your supplier, click Browse for External.
Or working online:
1. Select Device then Manage IED.
2. Select the IED type device number.
3. Select the IED address and click Next. The IED Configurator tool reads information from the IED and shows
them in the Summary view.
Then:
1. Double click TEMPLATE in the left-hand pane to expand the tree structure.
2. Click the Dataset Definitions item.
If supported by the IED, datasets can be dynamically defined.
1. Right-click the Dataset Definitions item and select Add New Dataset.
or on the Dataset Definitions Summary page, in the Task pane, click Add Dataset.
2. Find the dataset to be specified and click Set. A dataset can be created in any logical node of the IED's data
model.
3. The Dataset Definition appears listing Name, Location, Contents and GOOSE Capacity.
The following settings can be edited.
Name The name of the dataset. This value is derived from the Dataset section of the selected logical node location
in the configured SCL file. The initial character must be an alphabetic character (a-z, A-Z) while the remainder of
the name can be either alphanumeric or the underscore symbol. The dataset name must be unique in the logical
node where it is contained. Editable in Manual Editing Mode.
Location The location of the dataset in the IED data model. The location is always read-only. To change the read-
only status, click >>. Specify a new location for the dataset. Editable in Manual Editing Mode.
Contents This shows the Functionally Constrained Data Attributes (FCDA) contained in the dataset. The ordering of
these FCDA items in this list shows how values are seen over MMS communications.
Using the following icons on the toolbar, FCDA items can be moved around, deleted or added.
Toolbar Icon Definition
Up & down arrows icon These toolbar buttons move the selected FCDA up and down in the dataset definition.
This toolbar button launches a dialog that allows you to select multiple FCDA items which
can be added to the dataset definition. Items that can be selected have an outline tick
Plus symbol
symbol. Items that have been selected have a green tick symbol and are shown in the
selection summary at the bottom of the dialog.
Minus symbol This toolbar button removes the selected FCDA items from the dataset definition.
For convenience a dataset can be defined from a supported Functional Constraint. This
Square dot icon toolbar button expands the selected Functional Constraint into a list of Data Objects it
contains. A dataset cannot contain both Data Objects and a Functional Constraint.

62 P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6
S1 Agile Settings Application Software

Toolbar Icon Definition


If the dataset is assigned to one or more control blocks (GOOSE), clicking this toolbar
button automatically increments each control block's Configuration Revision. The
Configuration Revision is used to identify changes to data, therefore this toolbar button is
Rotating arrows icon only enabled when the dataset definition is modified.
If you change the selected configuration page and this toolbar button is enabled, you are
asked if associated Configuration Revisions should be updated. Editable in Manual Editing
Mode.

GOOSE Capacity. The size (in bytes) of a GOOSE message has an upper restriction. It can not be any larger than
the maximum allowable size of an Ethernet frame. This restriction limits the maximum number of items that can
be included in a dataset.
The GOOSE Capacity gauge shows how large a dataset definition is with respect to GOOSE. If a dataset that is too
large for transmission in a GOOSE message is assigned to a GOOSE Control Block, a validation warning appears.
Read-only.
To delete Dataset definitions,
1. Right-click the dataset definition icon.
2. Select Delete Dataset.
or
1. In the Dataset Definitions Summary page, select a dataset.
2. In the task pane, click Delete Dataset.
To delete every dataset definition in the configuration data, click Delete All Datasets.
Any references in GOOSE or Reporting Control Blocks to the deleted dataset remain unchanged. However, a
validation warning appears stating that the dataset definition does not exist.

7.7.8 CONFIGURING OPTIMISED PERFORMANCE GOOSE DATASETS


If supported by the IED, an Optimised Performance GOOSE (OPGoose) dataset can be created. OPGoose is a special
datasets whose elements are prioritised for processing by the IED. The information contained in this dataset is for
use in high speed GOOSE applications such as tripping or blocking signals between IEDs.
To configure an Optimised Performance Goose dataset:
1. Right-click the Dataset Definitions icon and select Add New OPGoose Dataset or on the Dataset
Definitions Summary page, in the Task pane, click Add New OPGoose Dataset. The dataset will
automatically be populated with all default elements supported for prioritised processing.
2. To add or remove an element from the dataset, select the + and - buttons, or right-click anywhere in the
element list contents window and select Add new FCDA item(s) or Delete FCDA item(s). When adding
elements, only the OPGoose-related Data Attributes will be listed and shown within the selection table.
3. In the Dataset FCDA Object Selector window, the list of items to add may be viewed as a flat list or
Hierarchical list by selecting the required Flat view or Hierarchy view radio button.
4. To move elements up and down the dataset list, select the á and â buttons

Note:
Only one OPGoose dataset may be created per supporting device.

P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6 63
Settings Application Software S1 Agile

7.7.9 GOOSE PUBLISHING CONFIGURATION


Working offline:
1. Select File then New. The Select Template window appears.
2. To select the template, enter the IED model number or select the product group. The lower pane shows
information about the IED's associated ICD template file, the SCL header details and the IEC 61850 features
supported by the IED.
3. If you can find the IED type or ICD template, click Select.
If there is no installed ICD file for the IED but there is one from your supplier, click Browse for External.
Or working online:
1. Select Device then Manage IED, then select the IED type device number.
2. Select the IED address and click Next. The IED Configurator tool reads information from the IED and shows
them in the Summary view.
Then:
1. Double click TEMPLATE in the left-hand pane to expand the tree structure.
2. Click the GOOSE Publishing item. Then select a GOOSE Control Block (GoCB).
The following details can be edited.
Multicast MAC Address Configures the multicast MAC address to that which the GoCB publishes GOOSE
messages. The first four octets (01 – 0C – CD – 01) are defined by the IEC 61850 standard; leave these at their
default values. The multicast MAC address is taken from the ConnectedAP/GSE section of the configured SCL file.
Editable in Manual Editing Mode.
Application ID Configures the AppID to that which the GoCB publishes GOOSE messages. The AppID is specified as
a hexadecimal value with a setting range of 0 to 3FFF and is taken from the ConnectedAP/GSE section of the
configured SCL file. Editable in Manual Editing Mode.
VLAN Identifier Configures the VLAN (Virtual LAN) on to which the GOOSE messages are published. The VLAN
Identifier has a setting range of 0 to 4095 and is taken from the ConnectedAP/GSE section of the configured SCL
file. If no VLAN is used, leave this setting at its default value. Editable in Manual Editing Mode.
VLAN Priority Configures the VLAN Priority of published GOOSE messages on the VLAN. The VLAN priority has a
setting range of 0 to 7 and is taken from the ConnectedAP/GSE section of the configured SCL file. If no VLAN is
used, leave this setting at its default value. Editable in Manual Editing Mode.
Minimum Cycle Time Configures the Minimum Cycle Time between the first change-driven message being
transmitted and its first repeat retransmission. The Minimum Cycle Time has a setting range of 1 to 50 milliseconds
and is taken from the ConnectedAP/GSE/MinTime section of the configured SCL file. Editable in Manual Editing
Mode.
Maximum Cycle Time Configures the Maximum Cycle Time between repeat message transmissions under a
quiescent 'no change' state. The Maximum Cycle Time has a setting range of 1 to 60 seconds and is taken from the
ConnectedAP/GSE/MaxTime section of the configured SCL file. Editable in Manual Editing Mode.
Increment Determines the rate at which the repeat message transmission intervals step up from the Minimum
Cycle Time to the Maximum Cycle Time. The higher the number, the fewer the repeat messages (and therefore
time) it takes to reach the Maximum Cycle Time. This setting is not taken from SCL. It is specific to MCL with a
setting range of 0 to 999 and has no units. Editable in Manual Editing Mode.
GOOSE Identifier Configures the 64 character GOOSE Identifier (GoID) of the published GOOSE message that is
configured in the SCL file. The initial character must be alphabetic (a to z or A to Z) while the rest of the name can
be either alphanumeric or the underscore symbol. The GOOSE Identifier must be unique for the entire system. This
setting is taken from the LN0/GSEControl section of the configured SCL file. Editable in Manual Editing Mode.
Dataset Reference Configures the dataset which is to be included in the GoCB's published messages. Only
datasets that belong to the same logical node as the GoCB can be selected for inclusion in the GOOSE messages. If
the dataset definition does not exist or is too large for publishing in a GOOSE message, a warning appears.

64 P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6
S1 Agile Settings Application Software

This setting is taken from the LN0/GSEControl section of the configured SCL file. Right-click the Dataset Reference
control to perform the following operations:
● Create and assign a new dataset definition. Only if the current dataset assignment is empty.
● Delete the current dataset assignment. Only if there is an assigned dataset.
● Edit the currently assigned datasets definition. Only if there is an assigned dataset.
Editable in Manual Editing Mode.
Configuration Revision Displays the Configuration Revision of the published GOOSE message. If the dataset
reference or dataset contents are changed, the Configuration Revision must be incremented to allow other peers
listening to the published GOOSE messages to identify the change in configuration. This setting has a range of 0 to
4294967295 and is taken from the LN0/GSEControl section of the configured SCL file. Editable in Manual Editing
Mode.
Any other IED in the system that needs to subscribe to the published GOOSE messages of the MiCOM IEDs must
use the same value in its GOOSE subscription configuration.

7.7.10 GOOSE SUBSCRIPTION CONFIGURATION


Working offline:
1. Select File then New.
The Select Template window appears.
2. To select the template, enter the IED model number or select the product group. The lower pane shows
information about the IED's associated ICD template file, the SCL header details and the IEC 61850 features
supported by the IED.
3. If you can find the IED type or ICD template, click Select.
If there is no installed ICD file for the IED but there is one from your supplier, click Browse for External.
Or working online:
1. Select Device then Manage IED.
2. Select the IED type device number.
3. Select the IED address and click Next. The IED Configurator tool reads information from the IED and shows
them in the Summary view.
Then:
1. Double click TEMPLATE in the left-hand pane to expand the tree structure.
2. Click the GOOSE Subscribing item.
Configuration of the GOOSE Subscription depends on whether the IED configuration has been compiled from a
configured SCL file, from an MCL file or manually created.
GOOSE Subscription is also based on two concepts.
Mapped Inputs Applicable in all instances. A Mapped Input is an External Binding between two IEDs that is
assigned to a valid Data Attribute in the IED data model (the internal Data Attribute supports binding to an external
value).
For example, on a MiCOM Px40 device, a Mapped Input is an External Binding that has been assigned to a Virtual
Input for use in Programmable Scheme Logic.
Multicast MAC Address Configures the multicast MAC address to that which the GoCB publishes GOOSE
messages. The first four octets (01 – 0C – CD – 01) are defined by the IEC 61850 standard; leave these at their
default values. The multicast MAC address is taken from the ConnectedAP/GSE section of the configured SCL file.
Editable in Manual Editing Mode.
Application ID Configures the AppID to that which the GoCB publishes GOOSE messages. The AppID is specified as
a hexadecimal value with a setting range of 0 to 3FFF and is taken from the ConnectedAP/GSE section of the
configured SCL file. Editable in Manual Editing Mode.

P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6 65
Settings Application Software S1 Agile

Source Path The source path shows where the value taken from the incoming GOOSE message originates in the
publishing IEDs Data model (For example: P145\System\GosGGIO2\Ind1.stVal).
GoCB Source Reference This value is derived from the Inputs/ExtRef section of the selected Virtual Inputs Logical
Node definition in the configured SCL file.
GOOSE Identifier Configures the 64 character GOOSE Identifier (GoID) of the published GOOSE message that is
configured in the SCL file. The initial character must be alphabetic (a to z or A to Z) while the rest of the name can
be either alphanumeric or the underscore symbol. The GOOSE Identifier must be unique for the entire system. This
setting is taken from the LN0/GSEControl section of the configured SCL file. Editable in Manual Editing Mode.
Dataset Reference Configures the dataset which is to be included in the GoCB's published messages. Only
datasets that belong to the same logical node as the GoCB can be selected for inclusion in the GOOSE messages. If
the dataset definition does not exist or is too large for publishing in a GOOSE message, a warning appears.
This setting is taken from the LN0/GSEControl section of the configured SCL file. Right-click the Dataset Reference
control to perform the following operations:
● Create and assign a new dataset definition. Only if the current dataset assignment is empty.
● Delete the current dataset assignment. Only if there is an assigned dataset.
● Edit the currently assigned datasets definition. Only if there is an assigned dataset.

Configuration Revision Displays the Configuration Revision of the published GOOSE message. If the dataset
reference or dataset contents are changed, the Configuration Revision must be incremented to allow other peers
listening to the published GOOSE messages to identify the change in configuration. This setting has a range of 0 to
4294967295 and is taken from the LN0/GSEControl section of the configured SCL file. Editable in Manual Editing
Mode.
Any other IED in the system that needs to subscribe to the published GOOSE messages of the MiCOM IEDs must
use the same value in its GOOSE subscription configuration.
Data Obj Index This configures the index of the Data Object within the published GOOSE messages dataset that is
to be decoded and processed for assignment to the selected Virtual Input. The setting range is dependent on the
contents of the dataset and is derived from its definition in the configured SCL file.
Data Obj Type This configures the data type of the Data Object within the published GOOSE messages dataset
that is to be decoded and processed for assignment to the selected Virtual Input. The data type of the selected
Data Object is taken from the DataType Templates section of the configured SCL file and must match to one of the
pre-defined supported data types
Quality Obj Index This configures the index of an associated Quality Object within the published GOOSE messages
dataset that is to be cross checked and processed as part of the Data Object assignment to the selected Virtual
Input. It is not required to assign a quality object but if the selected Data Objects data type is a complex class (i.e.
SPS etc) that includes a quality attribute the assignment will be automatic. The setting range is dependent upon
the contents of the dataset and is derived from its definition in the configured SCL file.
Browse buttons These buttons present a dialog to allow for the quick and easy selection/configuration of a Data
Object from a published GOOSE message.
Unmap button This button is only applicable if the Source Path parameter has been specified (i.e. non-blank).
Clicking this button will remove the External Binding assignment from the selected Virtual Input. The External
Binding will now be located within the Unmapped Inputs section where it can then be (re)assigned to another
Virtual Input.

66 P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6
S1 Agile Settings Application Software

Evaluation Expression This configures the evaluation expression executed on the decoded Data Object value prior
to assigning to the selected Virtual Input. The available expressions are predefined:
● Equal To: The decoded value is compared against the configured value to see if they are equal. The result of
the comparison is converted to a BOOLEAN value for assignment to the Virtual Input; True = Values are
equal, False = Values are not equal.
● Not Equal To: The decoded value is compared against the configured value to see if they are not equal. The
result of the comparison is converted to a BOOLEAN value for assignment to the Virtual Input; True = Values
are not equal, False = Values are not equal.
● Greater Than: The decoded value is compared against the configured value to see if it is the greater of the
two values. The result of the comparison is converted to a BOOLEAN value for assignment to the Virtual
Input; True = Decoded values is greater than the configured value, False = Decoded value is less than (or
equal to) the configured value.
● Less Than: The decoded value is compared against the configured value to see if it is the lesser of the two
values. The result of the comparison is converted to a BOOLEAN value for assignment to the Virtual Input;
True = Decoded values is less than the configured value, False = Decoded value is greater than (or equal to)
the configured value.
● Pass Through: The decoded value is directly passed on to the Virtual Input.

This setting is not taken from SCL. It is specific to MCL.


Default Input Value This configures the default value the Virtual Input should take when it is not receiving
messages from the configured GOOSE publisher. The default value would normally be considered as a "System
safe" default value. The available default value options are selectable from a predefined list:
● FALSE: The Virtual input is held at a FALSE value while it is not receiving messages from the GOOSE
publisher.
● TRUE: The Virtual Input is held at a TRUE value while it is not receiving messages from the GOOSE publisher.
● Last Known Value: The Virtual Input remains at the value in the last received GOOSE message.
● Double Point: This option has four different values viz., Intermediate (00), Off (01), On (10) and Bad State (11).

This setting is not taken from SCL. It is specific to MCL.


Invalidity Quality Bits If a Quality Object has been assigned to the Virtual Input, this configures the quality bits
that are to be regarded as invalid/questionable. If any one of the selected quality identifiers is set in the decoded
Quality Object value, then the overall validity of the Virtual Input shall be invalid/questionable. The standard quality
bits are directly presented for selection and the additional Quality Detail information hidden. If invalidity is to be set
for a specific Quality Detail bit, this is displayed in a popup dialog by clicking the “>>” button:
Unmapped Inputs Primarily applicable to configured SCL files. An Unmapped Input is similar to the Mapped Input.
It is an External Binding between two IEDs but the binding has not yet been assigned to a supporting Data
Attribute in the IED data model.
For example, on a MiCOM Px40 device, an Unmapped Input is an External Binding that has been identified as
necessary for the IED configuration but has not yet been assigned to a Virtual Input for use in Programmable
Scheme Logic.

7.7.11 REPORT CONTROL BLOCK CONFIGURATION


Working offline:
1. Select File then New.
The Select Template window appears.
2. To select the template, enter the IED model number or select the product group. The lower pane shows
information about the IED's associated ICD template file, the SCL header details and the IEC 61850 features
supported by the IED.
3. If you can find the IED type or ICD template, click Select.
If there is no installed ICD file for the IED but there is one from your supplier, click Browse for External.

P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6 67
Settings Application Software S1 Agile

Or working online:
1. Select Device then Manage IED.
2. Select the IED type device number.
3. Select the IED address and click Next. The IED Configurator tool reads information from the IED and shows
them in the Summary view.
Then:
1. Double click TEMPLATE in the left-hand pane to expand the tree structure.
2. Click the Report Control Blocks item. Then select a Report Control Block (RCB).
The following details can be edited.
Report Type Displays the type of the selected RCB. Read-only.
Report ID Configures the default Report ID of the RCB. Any clients wanting to use the RCB can override this default
value if required. The initial character of the Report ID must be alphabetic (a to z or A to Z) while the rest of the
name can be either alphanumeric or the underscore symbol. This setting is taken from the LN(0)/ReportControl
section of the required RCB in the configured SCL file. Editable in Manual Editing Mode.
Dataset Reference Configures the dataset which is to be included in the generated reports from the RCB. Only
datasets that belong to the same logical node as the RCB can be included in the reports. This setting is taken from
the LN(0)/ReportControl section of the required RCB in the configured SCL file. Editable in Manual Editing Mode.
Configuration Revision Displays the Configuration Revision of the RCB. If there are any changes to dataset
reference or dataset contents, the Configuration Revision must be incremented to allow clients receiving the
reports to identify the change in configuration. This setting is taken from the LN(0)/ReportControl section of the
required RCB in the configured SCL file. Editable in Manual Editing Mode.

7.7.12 CONTROLS CONFIGURATION


Working offline:
1. Select File then New.
The Select Template window appears.
2. To select the template, enter the IED model number or select the product group. The lower pane shows
information about the IED's associated ICD template file, the SCL header details and the IEC 61850 features
supported by the IED.
3. If you can find the IED type or ICD template, click Select.
If there is no installed ICD file for the IED but there is one from your supplier, click Browse for External.
Or working online:
1. Select Device then Manage IED.
2. Select the IED type device number.
3. Select the IED address and click Next. The IED Configurator tool reads information from the IED and shows
them in the Summary view.
Then:
1. Double click TEMPLATE in the left-hand pane to expand the tree structure.
2. Click the Controls item.

68 P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6
S1 Agile Settings Application Software

The following details can be edited.


● Control Objects is the configuration of each Cotrol Object (Circuit Breaker Trip/Close control) in the IED's
data model, for example its Control Model Direct Operate, Select Before Operate.
This breaks down into:
○ ctlModel This configures the control model (ctlModel) of the Control Object to one of the following
predefined options and is is taken from the LN(0)/DOI/DAI/Val section of the ctlModel in the
configured SCL file. Editable in Manual Editing Mode.
Status Only
DOns (Direct Operate - Normal Security)
SBOns (Select-Before-Operate - Normal Security)
DOes (Direct Operate - Enhanced Security)
SBOes (Select-Before-Operate - Enhanced Security)
○ sboTimeout If supported by the Control Object, this configures the Select Before Operate timeout. A
client has the configured number of milliseconds to operate the control following the select
command. If the Control Object is not operated in this time period, it is reset back to an unselected
state. This setting is taken from the LN(0)/DOI/DAI/Val section of sboTimeout in the configured SCL
file. Editable in Manual Editing Mode.
● Uniqueness of Control This adds a layer of security onto control operations by allowing only one Control
Object to operate at any time in the whole system. Uniqueness of Control checks are performed using
GOOSE, making it simple and reliable without any server redundancy.

7.7.13 EDITING CONFIGURABLE DATA ATTRIBUTES


1. Select Device then Manage IED.
2. Select the IED type.
3. Select the IED address and click Next. The IED Configurator tool reads information from the IED and shows
them in the Summary view.
4. Click the Configurable Data Attributes tab.
5. Select a Data Attribute.
The following details can be edited.
Data Type This shows the SCL Data type of the Data Attribute. The data type influences the type of control used to
represent the Data Attributes value.
● Integer based types use a numeric up-down control to specifiy the value.
● Enumerated types use a combo box to specify the available setting values.
● String types use a text box to allow text entry.
Read-only.
Value This is the value to assign to the Data Attribute and is taken from the LN(0)/DOI/DAI/Val section of the
required Data Attribute in the configured SCL file. Editable in Manual Editing Mode.

7.7.14 EDITING MEASUREMENT CONFIGURATIONS


Working offline:
1. Select File then New. The Select Template window appears.
2. To select the template, enter the IED model number or select the product group. The lower pane shows
information about the IED's associated ICD template file, the SCL header details and the IEC 61850 features
supported by the IED.
3. If you can find the IED type or ICD template, click Select.
If there is no installed ICD file for the IED but there is one from your supplier, click Browse for External.

P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6 69
Settings Application Software S1 Agile

Or working online:
1. Select Device then Manage IED.
2. Select the IED type device number.
3. Select the IED address and click Next. The IED Configurator tool reads information from the IED and shows
them in the Summary view.
Then:
1. Double click TEMPLATE in the left-hand pane to expand the tree structure.
2. Click the Measurements item. Then Select a measurement object.
The following details can be edited.
Unit multiplier If supported by the IED, this configures how the measurement value will be scaled when read by or
reported to a client. The multiplier is shown in the following table.
Value Multiplier Name Symbol
-24 10–24 Yocto y
-21 10–21 Zepto z
-18 10–18 Atto a
-15 10–15 Femto f
-12 10–12 Pico p
-9 10–9 Nano n
-6 10–6 Micro ?
-3 10–3 Milli m
-2 10–2 Centi c
-1 10–1 Deci d
0 1
1 10 Deca da
2 102 Hecto h
3 103 Kilo k
6 106 Mega M
9 109 Giga G
12 1012 Tera T
15 1015 Petra P
18 1018 Exa E
21 1021 Zetta Z
24 1024 Yotta Y

For example, if the phase A current is 1250 amps and the multiplier is kilo (k), the relay measures 1.250 (kA).
Editable in Manual Editing Mode.
Scaled Measurement Range Min/Max If supported by the IED, this configures the minimum and maximum values
of a measurement object. The min and max values are used with the deadband value to calculate how much a
measurement must change to be updated or reported to a client. Editable in Manual Editing Mode.
Deadband This configures the deadband, which is a percentage change based on the measurements range in
units of 0.001% (giving a range of 0 to 100000). A deadband of 0 means the measurement is updated
instantaneously. To simplify the calculation process, click the >> button. Specify the deadband as a percentage
change (such as 5%) or as an absolute change (such as 0.1 Hz). Editable in Manual Editing Mode. The deadband

70 P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6
S1 Agile Settings Application Software

can be specified at any level in the Measurements tab. The range, including the multiplier, can only be specified at
a level where all measurement objects are of the same type. For example, all phase current measurements.

7.8 FULL VALIDATION OF IED CONFIGURATION


The IED Configurator can be used to validate configured SCL files against the SCL schema when they are opened.
It can also validate an IED's MCL configuration at any time.
1. In the SCL Explorer workspace, right-click a MiCOM IED and click Validate.
2. The selected MiCOM IED is validated and the results appear in a Validation Log window. The log shows three
levels of classification:
○ Information. No actions required.
○ Warning. Some consideration may be required.
○ Error. IED may not function as expected with current configuration.
3. Double-click a warning or error item. The configuration page that generated the log entry appears. Double
clicking information entries has no effect.

7.9 VALIDATION SUMMARY


1. Select Device then Manage IED.
2. Select the IED type device number.
3. Select the IED address and click Next. The IED Configurator tool reads details from the IED and shows them
in the Summary view.
4. Select a category tab. A summary of each the configuration appears in the Summary pane. Double-click an
item and a list of log entries appears in the Validation Report pane.
The following log entries can be edited.
SNTP Summary. This shows all the server sources available for configuration in the IED. If a server source is
configured, it is shown in bold. Also the IP address of the external time synchronisation server is shown. If a server
source is unconfigured, it is shown greyed.
Dataset Definitions Summary. This shows all the datasets defined throughout the IED's data model. For each
defined dataset, its number of Functionally Constrained Data Attributes is also shown. The summary page includes
a common set of tasks to manage the dataset definitions.
GOOSE Publishing Summary. This shows all of the GOOSE Control Blocks (GoCB) available in the IED. If a GoCB is
fully configured, it is shown in bold. A partially configured GoCB is shown in normal typeface. If a GoCB is
unconfigured, it is shown greyed.
GOOSE Subscribing Summary. This shows all of the Virtual Inputs available in the IED. If a Virtual Input is fully
configured, it is shown in bold. A partially configured Virtual Input is shown in normal typeface. If a Virtual Input is
unconfigured, it is shown greyed. Any unmapped inputs are listed in an additional summary.
Report Control Block Summary. This shows all of the Report Control Blocks (RCB) available in the IED. If an RCB is
fully configured, it is shown in bold. A partially configured RCB is shown using in normal typeface. If an RCB is
unconfigured, it is shown greyed.
Control Objects Summary. This shows all of the Control Objects available in the IED's data model, and what their
configured control model is (Direct Operate, Select Before Operate).
Uniqueness of Control Summary. This shows all of the Virtual Inputs available in the IED. If a Virtual Input is fully
configured, it is shown in bold. A partially configured Virtual Input is shown in normal typeface. If a Virtual Input is
unconfigured, it is shown greyed. Any unmapped inputs are listed in an additional summary.
Measurements Summary. The Measurements summary shows all of the Measurement Objects available in the
IED's data model, plus their configured range and deadband.
Configurable Data Attributes Summary. The Configurable Data Attribute summary shows all of the Configurable
Data Attributes available in the IED's data model, plus their data type and configured value.

P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6 71
Settings Application Software S1 Agile

7.10 MANAGING SCL SCHEMA VERSIONS


The IED Configurator supports several versions of the SCL schema. This improves its reliability and correctly
validates any version of SCL file. The schema files are not available and are encoded into a proprietary binary
format that allows basic version control management by the IED Configurator tool.
Existing schema versions can be removed or new versions added.
1. Select Tools then Options.
2. Click the General tab.
3. Click the Manage Schemas button. New schema versions are provided in a binary distribution file.
4. Click a schema and its details are shown in the left-hand pane.
To add a new SCL Schema:
1. In the left-hand pane, click Add New SCL Schema then search for the binary schema distribution file.
2. Click Open to import the file. The IED Configurator merges all schema versions in the distribution file into the
application repository. If a schema version is already available in the application repository it is skipped.
To remove an SCL Schema:
1. In the right-hand pane, right-click a schema and select Remove Schema File. This removes the selected SCL
schema from the application repository. The operation cannot be undone.

7.10.1 ADDING AND REMOVING SCL SCHEMAS


To add a new SCL Schema:
1. Select Tools then Options.
2. Click the General tab.
3. Click the Manage Schemas button.
4. In the left-hand pane, click Add New SCL Schema then search for the binary schema distribution file.
5. Click Open to import the file. The IED Configurator merges all schema versions in the distribution file into the
application repository. If a schema version is already available in the application repository it is skipped.
To remove an SCL Schema:
1. Select Tools then Options.
2. Click the General tab.
3. Click the Manage Schemas button.
4. In the right-hand pane, right-click a schema and select Remove Schema File. This removes the selected SCL
schema from the application repository. The operation cannot be undone.

7.11 CONFIGURATION BANKS


In the MiCOM IED there are two configuration banks for IEC 61850 configuration. The configuration bank concept is
similar to that of setting groups for protection settings, promoting version management and helping to minimise
IED down-time during system upgrades and maintenance.
To view an IED's configuration bank details:
1. Establish a connection to the MiCOM IED.
2. Select Device then Manage IED.
3. If the connection to the MiCOM IED is successful, the Manage IED window appears showing the details of
the Active and Inactive configuration banks.
The following configuration banks can be edited.

72 P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6
S1 Agile Settings Application Software

Switch banks button. This toggles the IED's configuration banks so the Active Bank becomes inactive and the
Inactive Bank becomes active. The switching technique used ensures the system down-time is minimised to the
start-up time of the new configuration.
Refresh banks button. This forces the IED Configurator tool to refresh the details displayed for the Active and
Inactive configuration banks. It is especially useful if, for example, configuration banks have been toggled directly
on the IED.
Extract ICD file button. This button is only enabled for IEDs that hold their own local copy of their ICD template file.
Press this button to define where the ICD template file that is contained in the IED should be saved. After the ICD
template is extracted, it can be made available as an Installed template.
Extract configuration buttons. These buttons extract the appropriate configuration bank and open it for viewing
or editing in a new window.

7.12 TRANSFER OF CONFIGURATIONS


The IED Configurator tool can be used to transfer configurations to and from any supporting MiCOM IED.
If you send a configuration to a supporting MiCOM IED, it is automatically stored in the Inactive configuration bank.
It therefore does not immediately affect the current Active configuration.
To send a configuration to a MiCOM IED:
1. Establish a connection to the MiCOM IED.
2. Select Device then Send Configuration.
3. The IED Configurator tool checks the compatibility of the IED model number. It then transfers the
configuration to the IED.

7.13 EXPORTING INSTALLED ICD TEMPLATE FILES


Any installed ICD template file can be exported by the IED Configurator tool to a user-defined location.
1. Select Tools then Export Installed ICD File. The Template dialog appears.
2. Select the MiCOM IED type for which the template file is to be exported.
3. Click the Select button. Specify the location and filename of the ICD template file being exported.

7.14 EXPORTING CONFIGURED SCL FILES


Any IED configuration in an Editor window can be exported to a configured SCL file, if it has not been opened for
restricted editing. To export a configured SCL file, the IED Configurator tool needs the IED's ICD template file.
1. In an Editor window, select Tools then Export Configuration to SCL.
2. Select the MCL configuration file which is to be exported.
3. Specify the destination file name for the configured SCL file.
Configuration items that are specific to MCL are not exported. This is because the information is not supported by
the SCL schema. It is therefore important to save the configuration in an MCL file.
The main reason for exporting configured SCL files is to allow configuration information to be shared between
multiple tools. This is for the configuration of, for example, GOOSE message exchange.

Note:
For IEC 61850 Edition 2 products, two different types of SCL schema can be exported:
Schema v3.1 for complete Edition 2 systems.
Schema v2.1 for mixed Edition 1 and Edition 2 systems. This is the backwards compatible version.

P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6 73
Settings Application Software S1 Agile

7.15 EXPORTING LOGICAL DEVICE AND NODE MODELS TO A DOCUMENT


A document containing logical node and device model lists may be exported as a Microsoft Word file (*.doc or
*.docx), or an Adobe Reader Portable Document Format (PDF) file to a user defined location.
1. Select Tools then Export Logical Devices to Doc. The Save As dialog appears.
2. Choose a suitable location and file name.
3. Select the Save as type: Word Document (*.docx), Word 97-2003 (*doc) or PDF Document (*.pdf)
4. Select Save.
A document will be created that identifies the modified logical nodes and devices. Use this in combination with the
device PIXIT for the complete IEC 61850 modelling documentation.

7.16 MANAGING LOGICAL DEVICES AND NODES


The Manage Logical Devices option allows users to customise the IEC 61850 modelling structure. Information can
be presented in a standardised manner between different IEDs.
This option is currently only available for devices that support IEC 61850 Edition 2
The following restrictions apply when editing logical devices and nodes:
● Logical Devices can be freely renamed or and all can be deleted except for SYSTEM
● Logical Nodes can be both freely renamed or deleted, except for LLN0 and LPHD
● Only Logical Nodes can be moved between different Logical Devices
● Only new Logical Devices can be created

Note:
If using test mode features, logical nodes should not be moved from their default locations. This is because if a logical node is
moved, its test mode behaviour will no longer be consistent between parent and child.

7.16.1 EDITING LOGICAL DEVICES AND NODES


To edit logical devices and nodes, select Tools then Manage Logical Devices. The configuration view is selected by
the Hierarchy view and Flat view radio buttons.

Configuration Views
● Flat view, is the standard view for devices with IEC 61850 Edition 1. All logical devices are at the same level,
and there is no hierarchy shown between the logical devices.
● Hierarchy, presents logical devices grouped as parents and children. This is used to model nested functions
and sub-functions, for example CB Control contains the sub-function CB Fail in the hierarchy view, whereas
in the flat view both of these logical devices are presented at the same level.

7.16.2 CONFIGURING LOGICAL DEVICES


To create a logical device:
1. In the Manage Logical Devices window, select Add LD, and assign a name using the Inst field.
2. Select Save.

Note:
A new logical device is indicated with a green icon.

74 P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6
S1 Agile Settings Application Software

To delete a logical device:


1. Select the tick box next to the logical device.
2. Select Remove.

Note:
Multiple selections can be made when deleting.

To rename a logical device:


1. In the Manage Logical Devices window, select the required logical device then Edit and modify the Inst
(instance) field as necessary.
2. Select Save.
To restore a logical device to its default setting:
1. Select Compare with default.
2. In the Default Configuration window, select the tick box next to the logical device.
3. Select Restore

Note:
Multiple selections can be made when restoring.

To finalise configuration changes:


1. Select Apply Configuration.The new logical device structure will then be in effect.

7.16.3 CONFIGURING LOGICAL NODES


To move a logical node:
1. Click on the logical node then drag and drop it onto the newly created logical device.

Note:
Logical nodes cannot be moved to a default logical device, they can only be moved to user created logical devices.

To rename a logical node:


1. In the Manage Logical Devices window, select the logical node then Edit and modify the Prefix and Inst
fields as necessary. The LN class field is restricted and cannot be renamed.
2. Select Save.
To delete a logical node:
1. Select the tick box next to the logical node.
2. Select Remove.

Note:
Multiple selections can be made when deleting.

P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6 75
Settings Application Software S1 Agile

To restore a logical node to its default setting:


1. Select Compare with default.
2. In the Default Configuration window, select the tick box next to the logical node.
3. Select Restore.

Note:
Multiple selections can be made when restoring.

To finalise configuration changes:


1. Select Apply Configuration. The new logical node structure will then be in effect.

76 P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6
S1 Agile Settings Application Software

8 DNP3 CONFIGURATOR
DNP3 (Distributed Network Protocol) is a master/slave protocol developed for reliable communications between
various types of data acquisition and control equipment. It allows interoperability between various SCADA
components in substations. It was designed to function with adverse electrical conditions such as electromagnetic
distortion, aging components and poor transmission media.
The DNP3 Configurator allows you to retrieve and edit its settings and send the modified file back to a MiCOM IED.

8.1 PREPARING FILES OFFLINE TO SEND TO AN IED


To prepare files, it is not necessary to connect to an IED.
1. Select the IED type.
2. Click the DNP3 Settings File tile.
3. Click Open Default File.
4. Select the IED from the list and click Next.
5. Type or select a model number and click Finish. The Default DNP3 Settings screen appears.
Or
1. From the main screen, select File then Open File then Px40 then DNP3 Settings File.
2. Select the IED file from the list and click Open.
Then
1. Expand the Explorer view and double click an item.
2. The left-hand column shows a list of available Master Points. Using the buttons, add or remove items from
the left-hand column to list of Configured Points in the right-hand column.
3. Right-click any Configured Point in the right-hand column for further settings.
4. Click OK.

8.2 SEND SETTINGS TO AN IED


To send settings to a device, connect the PC to the IED and select the communication port. See Getting Started.
There must be at least one setting file in a settings folder for a device.
1. From the main screen, select View then System Explorer.
2. Expand the view to see the required device.
3. Right-click the device name and select Send.
4. In the Send to... dialog, select the setting files and click Send.
5. Click Close.

8.3 EXTRACT SETTINGS FROM AN IED


1. From the main screen, select View then System Explorer.
2. Expand the view to see the required device.
3. Right-click the device name and select Extract Settings. To exrtract all settings select Extract Full Settings
then Yes.
4. Click Close.

P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6 77
Settings Application Software S1 Agile

8.4 VIEW IED SETTINGS


1. In the right-hand pane, expand the system to show the device.
2. Double click the device to show the DNP3 file.
3. Double click the DNP3 file to open it, or right click to select New File.
4. The left-hand pane shows the DNP3 settings. Expand to see all settings.

78 P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6
S1 Agile Settings Application Software

9 CURVE TOOL
The User Programmable Curve Tool (UPCT) allows you to create user-defined curves and to download and upload
these curves to and from the IED. You can use this tool to create programmable operate and reset curves. You can
also create and visualize curves either by entering formulae or data points.

9.1 FEATURES
The Curve Tool allows you to:
● Create, edit and save new curves or edit existing curve files
● Enter a defined number of curve points or a user-defined formula
● Create, edit and save multiple formulae
● Use templates to provide all the data needed to create new curves
● Interpolate between curve points using a template
● Create a curve from a fixed or user defined formula
● Save curve formulae in XML format and configure curve points in CSV format, enabling easy data exchange
● Save configured curve data in CRV format, suitable for download into the IED
● Easily upload the curve data from an IED
● Input constants with user-defined values
● Graphically display curves with zoom, pan, and point-on-curve facilities
● Multiple curves can be drawn and visualized simultaneously
● Curves can be drawn with different colors for better visualization and easy comparison
● Print curves or save curves in a range of standard image formats

9.2 CURVE PLOT PANE


The Curve Plot pane displays the curves showing time on the y-axis and Q (multiples of nominal current) on the x-
axis. This is the standard method of defining protection IED configuration curves.
Right-click anywhere in the Curve Plot pane to carry out a range of flexible operations on the curves from the
context-sensitive menu. Operations include copying the image, zooming, panning and printing. Images can be
saved as PNG, GIF, JPEG, TIFF or BMP.
Right-click any point on the plot and select Show Point Values to show the Q and T values at that point.

9.2.1 OPEN A CURVE


You can open a curve either through the formula or throught the input table.
1. Select File then Open.
2. To open an XML curve file, select Formula or to open a CRV or CSV curve file, select Input Table.
3. Select the required curve file. You can open several curves and the Curve Selection pane shows a list of
those available. As you import or create more curves, they appear as rows in the table.
4. Check the checkbox to select a curve and the corresponding row is then highlighted. Selecting the curve
displays it in the Curve Plot pane and makes it available for upload or download.
5. Select View then Show Curve Details to view the Curve Details.

9.2.2 ZOOMING AND PANNING


To zoom in, drag a box around the area using the mouse.
To pan, press and hold the shift key and left mouse button while moving the mouse.

P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6 79
Settings Application Software S1 Agile

To un-zoom or un-pan, right-click the Curve Plot and select Un-zoom or Un-pan.
To revert to the original view, right-click the Curve Plot and select Undo All Zoom/Pan.

9.2.3 CHANGE THE GRAPH TO DEFAULT SIZE


To set the graph to its default size:
1. Right click the Curve Plot area.
2. Select Set Scale to Default from the context-sensitive menu.

9.2.4 CHANGE THE GRAPH GRID LINES


To change the grid lines:
1. Select Graph Options then Grid Lines.
2. Select Major Grid Lines or Minor Grid Lines to show the grid lines in a coarse or fine scale.

9.2.5 CHANGE THE GRAPH SCALE


To change the graph scale:
1. Select Graph Options.
2. Select the X-Axis Scale or Y-Axis Scale.
3. Select Linear or Logarithmic.

9.2.6 CHANGE CURVE COLOURS


To change curve colours:
1. Select View then Show Curve Detail. The Curve Points Details window appears in the left-hand pane.
2. Change the curve colour in the Input Table View and the Product View. The colour changes appear in the
Curve Plot.
3. Select File then Save, then Input Table View to save the curve. Or select Save As.

9.2.7 PRINT A CURVE


To print a curve:
Select File then Print or Print Preview.
or
Right-click the Curve Plot area and select Print from the context-sensitive menu.

9.2.8 SAVE A CURVE AS AN IMAGE


To save a curve as a bitmap image:
1. Right click the Curve Plot area.
2. Select Save Image As from the context-sensitive menu.
3. Select the required image format and click Save.

9.3 CURVE POINTS DETAILS PANE


To show further details about the curves, select View then Show Curve Detail. This shows the curve as a table of
points.
In the Curve Points Details pane you can give the curve a name and description using standard ASCII characters.
The name allows up to 16 characters and the description up to 256 characters. If you do not enter a name, it uses

80 P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6
S1 Agile Settings Application Software

the default name New Curve and similarly the default description is Curve Description. The formula name and
template version are also displayed if applicable.
To auto-hide the Curve Details, click the icon next to the cross. This shows the plot full size and only shows the
curve detail when you position the cursor in the marked area in the left-hand margin.
To close the Curve Points Details pane, click the X in the right-hand corner.

9.3.1 CREATE A NEW CURVE


You can create a curve either through the formula or throught the input table.
1. Select File then New. Then select either Formula or Input Table.
2. If you select Formula:
a. The Formula Editor appears.
b. Enter the required formula in the Input Formula Editor tab.
c. Select the required template from the Curve Template drop-down list.
d. Enter a name in the Formula Name text box.
e. Enter constant values in the Input Constants tab.
f. Click Verify Formula then click Generate Curve.
g. Select File then Save, then Input Table View to save the curve. Or select Save As.
3. If you select Input Table:
a. The Curve Points Details window appears in the left-hand pane.
b. Enter the required fields.
c. Select File then Save, then Input Table View to save the curve. Or select Save As.

9.3.2 ENTERING VALUES OF Q AND T INTO THE TABLE


The Curve Points dialog has three columns
Index. Each curve point has a unique index number associated with it, starting at 0, incrementing by 1 and ending
with the last curve point.
Q (multiples of setting). Q, in this context stands for Quantity. It is the secondary current Is, expressed in multiples
of the nominal current In.
T (Time in secs). T is the imposed delay time, expressed in seconds.
To input values for Q and T to define a new table:
1. Select File then New then Input Table.
2. Insert the values for Q and T up to a maximum of 256 curve points (index 0 to 255). The tool instantaneously
updates the graph view as points are entered. If fewer points are inserted, the tool automatically
interpolates points using linear interpolation.
To copy and paste an entire table from Excel or other compatible table formats:
1. Copy the table to the clipboard.
2. Position the cursor in the top left-hand Q cell and paste.

9.3.3 EDIT A CURVE


To edit a curve:
1. Select View then Show Curve Details. The Curve Points Details window appears in the left-hand pane.
2. Enter or edit the required fields.
3. Change the curve colour in the Input Table View and the Product View.
4. Select File then Save, then Input Table View to save the curve. Or select Save As.

P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6 81
Settings Application Software S1 Agile

9.3.4 INTERPOLATING CURVE POINTS


To interpolate curve points:
1. Load the curve, select View then Show Curve Details. The Curve Points Details window opens.
2. Tick the Show User Curve tick box.
3. Tick the Show Product Curve tick box to interpolate points using the template file and linear interpolation.

9.3.5 IMPORT CURVE POINTS


To import curve points from other applications:
1. Select View then Show Curve Details. The Curve Points Details window appears in the left-hand pane.
2. Open the application, for example, Excel.
3. In the application, copy the curve points to the clipboard in the required format.
4. In the left-hand pane, in the Curve Points field, position the cursor in the top left-hand Q cell and paste the
curve points.
5. Select File then Save, then Input Table View to save the curve. Or select Save As.

9.3.6 EXPORT CURVE POINTS


To export curve points to other applications:
1. Select View then Show Curve Details. The Curve Points Details window appears in the left-hand pane.
2. Open the application, for example, Excel.
3. In the left-hand pane, in the Curve Points field, copy the curve points to the clipboard.
4. Paste the curve points into the application.

9.4 FORMULA EDITOR


1. To open the Formula Editor select View then Show Formula Editor.
2. Enter the formula in the T= field. The formula is case sensitive, use only uppercase letters.
3. Select the required template from the Curve Template dropdown box. The curve you are creating with the
formula must be associated with a predefined template. This must match the template of one of the curves
stored in the IED. The template defines a curve with a specific spread of points which can be downloaded to
the IED.
4. Enter the formula name into the Formula Name field. This can be any combination of standard ASCII
characters up to 32 characters.
5. If you need a Definite Time characteristic, check the DMT (Definite Minimum Time) checkbox. Then enter
fixed values for the tripping current multiplier (Q) and the delay time (T).
6. You can enter any constants into the formula and the first eight letters of the Greek alphabet are included in
the formula editor as buttons. Click a button to enter the character in the Formula field.
7. Input the formula constants into the Value column.
8. To validate the formula, click the Verify Formula button at the bottom left corner of the screen. The names
of the constants used in the formula are shown in the Input Constants table. The formula verifier checks
the operators are valid but does not check if the formula is valid or if the results are out of range.
9. Select the Options tab, click Save As and enter a file name. The file is saved in XML format. Enter up to 16
standard ASCII characters.
10. Once the constants are entered and the file is saved, click the Generate Curve button (next to the Verify
Formula button) to generate a curve. The curve appears in the Curve Plot pane.

82 P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6
S1 Agile Settings Application Software

Allowed Formula Editor operators


Operators Description
+ Plus
- Minus
* Multiply
/ Divide
^ Raise to the power of
sqrt() Square Root
ln() Natural logarithm
Sin Sin function
Cos Cos function
Tan Tan function

9.4.1 PICK-UP SETTING AND TMS


The programmable curve is a set of points in a table which the software interpolates into a curve. It is treated in
the same way as all the other standard curves stored in the IED. Each curve has a pick-up setting and a Time
Multiplier Setting (TMS).
Most applications do not need the TMS feature, in which case you can set it to 1. However, the TMS can be useful in
some applications. For example, one user overcurrent curve could be created for several IEDs and the TMS can
then be set individually in each relay to achieve time grading.

9.5 CURVE TEMPLATES


Many protection functions use a graphical curve to define their Operate and Reset characteristics. These are
inverse curves with current on the x-axis and time on the y-axis and each curve has 256 points.
In the Phasor tool, the curves created with the formula or points table must match the templates of their
respective curves stored in the IED. Each curve is defined by 256 points with a specific spread of the points in
different areas of the curve.
The following are examples of Curve Tool templates.

Curve tool templates


Template Description
Overcurrent Operate Overcurrent protection IDMT operate curve
Overcurrent Reset Overcurrent protection IDMT reset curve
Thermal Overload Operate Thermal overload protection operate (heating) curve
Thermal Overload Reset Thermal overload protection reset (cooling) curve
Undervoltage Operate Undervoltage protection operate curve
Overflux Operate Overfluxing (V/Hz) protection operate curve

The curve templates have a clearly defined number of graphical points to define certain portions of the curve. The
following tables are examples of template definitions.

Overcurrent operate
Range Number of points
Range 1: 1x to 3x setting 128
Range 2: 3x to 32x setting 116

P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6 83
Settings Application Software S1 Agile

Range Number of points


Range 3: 32x to 76x setting 12
Overall range 256

Overcurrent reset
Range Number of points
Range 1: 1x to 0.96x setting 116
Range 2: 0.96x to 0.7x setting 128
Range 3: 0.7x to 0x setting 12
Overall range 256

Thermal overload operate


Range Number of points
Range 1: 1x to 4x setting 150
Range 2: 4x to 5x setting 68
Range 3: 5x to 10x setting 32
Range 4: 10x to 32x setting 6

Thermal overload reset

Range Number of points


Range 1: 1x to 0.96x setting 116
Range 2: 0.96x to 0.7x setting 128
Range 3: 0.7x to 0x setting 12
Overall range 256

Overflux operate
Range Number of points
Range 1: 1x to 2x setting 128
Range 2: 2x to 5x setting 116
Range 3: 5x to 10x setting 12
Overall range 256

Overflux reset
Range Number of points
Range 1: 1x to 0.96x setting 116
Range 2: 0.96x to 0.7x setting 128
Range 3: 0.7x to 0x setting 12
Overall range 256

Undervoltage operate
Range Number of points
Range 1: 1x to 0.95x setting 66
Range 2: 0.95x to 0x setting 190
Overall range 256

84 P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6
S1 Agile Settings Application Software

9.5.1 SELECT A CURVE TEMPLATE


To select a curve template:
1. Select View, then Show Formula Editor.
2. Select a template from the Curve Template dropdown list.
3. The selected template also appears in the Curve Points Details pane, in the Product View.

9.6 CONNECTING TO AN IED


Depending on the model, MiCOM IEDs have one or more of the following ports which you can use to transfer curve
files:
● Front USB
● Front serial
● Rear RS485
● Rear Ethernet

The front port is a temporary local connection used to set up the IED. The rear serial port is typically used for multi-
drop SCADA. The Ethernet port runs at 10/100 Mbps and is typically used for network SCADA.
To configure the communication settings for downloading and uploading the curves to and from the IED
1. Select Device then Connection Configuration. The Edit Connection dialog appears.
2. In the Scheme dropdown box, select which port to configure.
3. Click the Transaction Values tab. These are the default values. If you make changes and need to revert to
the default settings, click the Restore Defaults button.
The following is a list of transaction values and their definitions
Busy Hold-off Time (ms). The time interval used by Courier between receiving a BUSY response and sending a
subsequent POLL BUFFER command.
Busy Count. The maximum number of BUSY responses that will be accepted for a single Courier transaction
before aborting the transaction.
To cope with abnormal situations where a device is not replying correctly to requests, a limit is placed on the
number of BUSY responses that should be accepted. Without this limit the link to the device would be stuck in a
loop.
Reset Response Time (ms). The maximum time from sending the last byte of a Courier Reset Remote Link message
to receiving the first byte of a response. When that time has elapsed, the request is aborted.
Response Time (ms). The maximum time from a sending the last byte of a Courier message to receiving the first
byte of a response. When that time has elapsed the request is aborted. The Response Time parameter is used for
all messages except Courier Reset Remote Link messages.
Try Count. The number of tries before aborting the request.
Transmit Delay Time (ms). The minimum delay that is put between receiving a response and transmitting the next
request. Transmit delay is normally set to zero but can be set to a few milliseconds when using half duplex
communication. This gives the other end of the link time to change from transmitting to receiving.
Global Transmit Time (ms). The minimum delay that is put between transmitting a global message and the next
transmission.

9.6.1 CONNECTING TO A SERIAL PORT


If you connect to a serial port, the Serial tab appears.
1. Click the Serial tab. The fields are already populated with the default settings.
2. Enter the Relay Address. This is an integer which represents the Courier address of the IED.

P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6 85
Settings Application Software S1 Agile

9.6.2 CONNECTING TO THE ETHERNET PORT


If you connect to the Ethernet port, the Ethernet tab appears.
1. There is no DHCP support so you must know the IP address and enter it manually.
2. The TCP port can be dynamic or static. If you need a static TCP port, check the Use fixed incoming TCP port
checkbox and enter the Fixed incoming port number.
3. If the device is attached to a bay unit, click the Device is attached to a bay unit checkbox. Then select from
the Bus Address dropdown box.
4. Enter the Relay Address. This is an integer which represents the Courier address of the IED.

9.7 SEND A CURVE TO AN IED


1. To open an existing curve, select File then Open Curve. You can open several curves and the Curve
Selection pane has a list of those available. As you import or create more curves, they appear as rows in the
table.
2. Check the checkbox to select a curve and the corresponding row is then highlighted. Selecting the curve
displays it in the Curve Plot pane and makes it available for upload or download.
3. Click the Device tab and select Send Curve. The Send Curve Form appears.
4. The IED stores several curve characteristics. In the Curve Characteristic dropdown box, select which curve
you want to overwrite.
5. Click Send to send the curve to the IED then click Get Curve Ref.
6. Check the PC Curve Value is the same as the Relay Curve Value. This shows that the send has been
successful because it overwrites the existing Relay Curve Value.
7. To send a curve using a different template to the one stored in the device, go to the USER CURVES DATA
menu option on the front panel of the device. Scroll to the programmable curve that requires editing and
select the new template option.

9.8 EXTRACT A CURVE FROM AN IED


1. Select Device then Extract Curve.
2. Select File then Save then Input Table View to save the curve file in CSV format
or
select File then Save then Product View to save the curve file in CRV format.

86 P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6
S1 Agile Settings Application Software

10 S&R COURIER
Settings and Records - Courier enables you to connect to any Courier device, retrieve and edit its settings and send
the modified settings back to a Courier device, including DNP 3.0 configuration if supported by the device.
Although each device has different settings, each cell is presented in a uniform style, showing the permissible
range and step size allowed.
Settings and Records - Courier also enables you to:
● extract events from a device
● extract disturbance records from a device
● control breakers and isolators
● set the date and time on a device
● set the active group on a device
● change the address of a device
● save settings, protocol configuration, events and disturbance files to disk

10.1 SET UP IED COMMUNICATION


1. Select Device then Communications Setup. The Communications Setup dialog appears.
2. If the configuration you want to use already exists, select it from the Scheme drop-down list and click OK.
3. If the configuration you want to use does not exist, create a new communications setup.

10.2 CREATE A NEW COMMUNICATION SETUP


1. Select Device then Communications Setup. The Communications Setup dialog box appears.
2. Select the connection: Serial, Modem or Internet.
If using a serial connection,
1. Select the Serial tab.
2. In the COM Port drop-down list, select the serial port to which the device will be connected.
3. Select the Baud rate and Framing.
If using a modem,
1. Select the Modem tab.
2. Click Configure… to enter the phone number.
Then for all connection types,
1. Select the Transaction Values tab and complete the fields.
2. Click Save As.
3. Enter a name in the Save Communications Parameters As field and click OK.
4. Click OK to configure the communications port.

10.3 OPEN A CONNECTION


1. Select Device then Open Connection.
2. If known, enter the device address in the Address field, otherwise click Browse to scan available devices.

P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6 87
Settings Application Software S1 Agile

3. Click OK to open the connection.


4. Enter the password using four alphabetic characters.
5. Click OK. If the password is valid, the connection is made and the On-line window appears.

Note:
If the device is set to the default password, the Enter Password dialog is not needed for enhanced DNP 3.0 devices.

10.4 CREATE A NEW OR DEFAULT IED DNP 3.0 FILE


1. Select File then New.
2. Select DNP File. The New DNP 3.0 File dialog appears.
3. Select the required device type from the Device Type drop-down list. The model numbers for the device
type are displayed.
4. Select the model number from the Model Number list or use the Advanced button to construct the required
model number. If duplicate model numbers exist, the Header details give version numbers and other
identifying information. The appropriate language is displayed in the Language drop-down list, showing the
language of the file.
5. If more than one language type is supported, the Language drop-down list shows the languages for the
device type.
6. Click OK. A new DNP 3.0 file is generated, based on the selected model.

10.5 EXTRACT A SETTINGS FILE FROM A DEVICE


1. Select Device then Open Connection to open a connection to the required device.
2. In the Online Device window, right-click the device name.
3. Select Send To then New Settings File.
4. The New Settings File dialog appears. Select the device model number.
5. Click OK.
6. Once the extraction is complete, a window appears showing the settings.

10.6 SAVE A SETTINGS FILE


1. Select File then Save As.
2. Edit the File Name or Header fields as required.
3. Click Save.

10.7 SEND A SETTINGS FILE TO A DEVICE


1. Open a connection to the required device.
2. Make sure the destination file is in the active window.
3. Select File then Send To
4. Click the appropriate device.

88 P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6
S1 Agile Settings Application Software

11 MONITORING MODULE
The Monitoring Module retrieves diagnostic data (either monitor or test data) from specific cells of any Courier
device at predefined intervals and displays them as a list. The procedures for the operation and control of the
Courier Monitoring Module are described in the next section.

11.1 OFFLINE AND ONLINE MONITORING MODULE


The Monitoring module enables you to display and print, measurements and diagnostic data from any Courier
device. By setting the timer between 1 and 60 seconds, the device can be polled at regular intervals to display the
current state.
The Offline module contains the following menu options:
Menu Description
Page Setup...
Display the Page Setup dialog, enabling print settings to be changed.
File
Exit
Exit the Monitoring module.
Open Connection...
Display the Establish Connection dialog, enabling the PC to retrieve data from the connected
device. When the connection is made, a window is opened and measurement data is polled.
Device
Communications Setup...
Display the Communications Setup dialog, enabling you to select or set up the communication
settings and values to be used.

Setup Timer...
Polling
Display the Set Polling Timer dialog, enabling you to enter the time interval between polls.

Toolbar
Show/hide the toolbar.
View
Status Bar
Show/hide the status bar.
Contents
Display help topics.
Help
About Monitoring...
Display version and copyright information about the Monitoring Module.

11.2 ONLINE MONITORING MODULE


The Online module contains the following menu options:
Menu Description
Print...
Print the contents of the selected window.
Print Preview
Display the Print Preview window, showing how the selected data will appear when printed.
File
Page Setup...
Display the Page Setup dialog, enabling print settings to be changed.
Exit
Exit the Monitoring module.
This menu is only available when a device is connected.
Edit Copy
Copy the selected text to the clipboard.

P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6 89
Settings Application Software S1 Agile

Menu Description
Close Connection...
Close the connection to the online device and the window or windows in use.
Retrieve from Device >
Measurements
Open a window and retrieve measurement data.
Tests
Device
Open a window and retrieve the test items.
Refresh
Retrieve the values for the selected window from the device immediately.
Communications Setup...
Display the Communications Transaction Values dialog, enabling you to adjust the transaction values in
use.
Setup Timer...
Display the Set Polling Timer dialog, enabling you to enter the time interval between polls.
Start Polling
Start polling the device for information. Information will obtained from the device at the time interval set
Polling by the
Set Polling Timer dialog.
Stop Polling
Stop requesting information from the device. You must stop polling before carrying out any other
operations.
Toolbar
Show/hide the toolbar.
View
Status Bar
Show/hide the status bar.
This menu is only available when a device is connected.
Cascade
Window Arrange data windows so that the titles bars are visible.
Tile
Arrange data windows so they do not overlap.
Contents
Display help topics.
Help
About Monitoring...
Display version and copyright information about the Monitoring Module.

90 P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6
S1 Agile Settings Application Software

12 GOOSE EDITOR
Using the GOOSE Editor you can edit the UCA2 GOOSE settings for a MiCOM Px4x series IED. You can also map
GOOOSE inputs and outputs to the DDB signals of an IED.
The GOOSE Editor can extract settings from and send settings to an IED using a Courier port on the IED. It can also
save IED settings to a file on your PC or print them.

12.1 SET UP IED COMMUNICATION


1. Select Device then Communications Setup. The Communications Setup dialog appears.
2. If the configuration you want to use already exists, select it from the Scheme drop-down list and click OK.
3. If the configuration you want to use does not exist, create a new communications setup.

12.2 CREATE A NEW COMMUNICATION SETUP


1. Select Device then Communications Setup. The Communications Setup dialog box appears.
2. Select the connection: Serial, Modem or Internet.
If using a serial connection,
1. Select the Serial tab.
2. In the COM Port drop-down list, select the serial port to which the device will be connected.
3. Select the Baud rate and Framing.
If using a modem,
1. Select the Modem tab.
2. Click Configure… to enter the phone number.
Then for all connection types,
1. Select the Transaction Values tab and complete the fields.
2. Click Save As.
3. Enter a name in the Save Communications Parameters As field and click OK.
4. Click OK to configure the communications port.

12.3 OPEN A CONNECTION


1. Select Device then Open Connection.
2. If known, enter the device address in the Address field, otherwise click Browse to scan available devices.
3. Click OK to open the connection.
4. Enter the password using four alphabetic characters.
5. Click OK. If the password is valid, the connection is made and the On-line window appears.

Note:
If the device is set to the default password, the Enter Password dialog is not needed for enhanced DNP 3.0 devices.

12.4 SCAN FOR AVAILABLE DEVICES


1. Select Device then Open Connection. The Establish Connection dialog appears.
2. Click Browse. The Browse Available Relays dialog appears.

P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6 91
Settings Application Software S1 Agile

3. Enter the first and last device addresses to be scanned in the From and To fields.
4. Click Scan. A list of devices in the range appears.
5. Highlight the required device and click OK. The Open Connection dialog appears with the number of the
selected device in the Address field.

12.5 EXTRACT GOOSE SETTINGS FROM A DEVICE


1. Open a connection to the device. If GOOSE settings are not loaded, open a GOOSE file or create a new
GOOSE file.
2. Select Device then Receive from Relay.
3. The GOOSE settings file is extracted from the device. It can then be edited and saved.

12.6 OPEN, EDIT AND SAVE A GOOSE FILE


1. Select File then Open.
2. Select the required file and click Open.
3. Edit the selected GOOSE settings file.
4. Select File then Save or Save As.

12.7 SEND GOOSE SETTINGS TO A DEVICE


1. Open a connection to the device. If GOOSE settings are not loaded, open a GOOSE file or create a new
GOOSE file.
2. Select Device then Send to Relay. The Send Settings to Relay dialog appears.
3. Type in a Reference Identifier if required.
4. Click OK. The GOOSE settings are sent to the device.

92 P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6
S1 Agile Settings Application Software

13 GOOSE CONFIGURATOR
The GOOSE Configurator tool allows you to manage GOOSE schemes across multiple devices, with all connections
shown graphically. It also provides a detailed list of GOOSE messages, which can be exported to assist with
maintenance and commissioning.

13.1 OPEN AN MCL FILE


You can modify an MCL file if the data model is installed for that device. Unsupported MCL files are marked as NO
ICD and although you can open them, most operations are blocked.
To open an existing MCL file, select the File tab then Open then Browse. You can open up to 20 MCL files at the
same time.
To open MCL files exported from previous sessions in a single archive file, select the File tab then Open then
Import. Files can be added to the current session or opened in a new one.
To import files to a folder with an archive name, select the File tab then Options and check the check box.

13.2 EXPORT FROM AN S1 SYSTEM TO GOOSE CONFIGURATOR


A quick way to create a GOOSE Configurator diagram is to export the MCL files from an S1 system directly into the
GOOSE Configurator. This simplifies creating a one to one equivalent setup on GOOSE configurator for creating all
the GOOSE connections.
Right click on the System name on the S1 System Explorer structure and select the Show GOOSE connections
options. All relays with created MCL files will be shown.
You can now select which MCL files you want to export to the GOOSE configurator for each relay in the S1 system.
You can also pick an associated PSL file, which can be used for quick logic configuration of the GOOSE signals in
the PSL Editor.

13.3 PUBLISH A MESSAGE


The Goose Configurator tool allows you to modify an MCL file to publish a new message.
1. Select the IED from which you want to publish a message.
2. Click Publish a message.
3. Select the Goose Control Block from which you want to publish a message. Click Next.
4. From the tree structure, select which messages you want to publish. Click Finish. The messages are then
published.
5. Once the message is successfully published, a horizontal line appears next to the device.
6. To view a list of published messages, click Show published messages.
7. To export the list of published messages as an Excel file, click Export to Excel.
8. Click Close View to to return to the main menu..

13.4 SHOW PUBLISHED MESSAGES


1. To display all messages that are published from opened MCL files, click Show published messages.
2. To remove published messages from the list, select the message and click Remove publishing. A warning
appears if any messages are subscribed to by other IEDs.
3. To export the list of published messages to an Excel file, click Export to Excel.
4. Click Close View to return to the main menu.

P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6 93
Settings Application Software S1 Agile

13.5 CLONE PUBLISHING


You can clone published messages across compatible MCL files which use the same source ICD file.
1. Click Clone publishing. A list of all published messages appears.
2. Select the IED from which you want to clone messages and click Next.
3. Select the target IED for clone messages. Only IEDs which use the same ICD file are listed.
4. Click Finish. Messages are cloned and results of the operation appear.

13.6 SUBSCRIBE TO A MESSAGE


To make connection between IEDs, you must first subscribe to a published message.
1. Click Subscribe to a message.
2. Select the IED to which you want to subscribe a message and click Next.
3. From the tree structure, select the subscribing block and click Next.
4. Select the IED which publishes the messages and click Next.
5. Select the message to which you want to subscribe and click Finish. Subscribing to a published message
makes a connection between IEDs. The connection is marked with black dot.

13.7 SET A PSL FILE PATH


You can associate a PSL file to enable quick configuration of GOOSE signals.
Right click on an IED and select the Set PSL file path option. Locate the file using the explorer pop up window and
select it.

13.8 OPEN A PSL FILE PATH


You can open open a PSL file to enable quick configuration of GOOSE signals.
Right click on an IED and select the Open PSL file. This will launch PSL Editor with the associated PSL file.

13.9 MANAGE GOOSE CONNECTIONS


1. To display connections between IEDs click Show Goose Connections.
2. To remove connections from the list, select the connection and click Unsubscribe from message. A warning
appears if any connections are subscribed to by other IEDs.
3. To export the list of connections to an Excel file, click Export to Excel.
4. Click Close View to return to the main menu.

13.10 SHOW IED DETAILS


To show the IED details, select the IED and click Show IED details.

13.11 WORKING WITH SCL FILES


The GOOSE Configurator also allows you to include non MiCOM devices by letting you import CID, IID or SCD files,
External devices and MiCOM relays without a datamodel installed only allow to be used in GOOSE configurator as
publishers.
The tool also allows you to export individual devices as CID, IID files or the entire diagram as SCD, if it was originally
created from an SCD.

94 P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6
S1 Agile Settings Application Software

13.12 SAVE CHANGES


Publishing and subscribing messages changes the MCL files.
To save all MCL files, select the File tab, then Info, then Save All.
To save currently opened MCL files, select the File tab then Info then Save Session.
To save currently opened MCL files to a single archive file, select the File tab then Info then Export.
To save an individual MCL file:
1. Select the File tab then Info.
2. In the Currently opened files list, select the relevant file and click the Save link.

13.13 RESTORE MCL FILES


To restore MCL files to the previous session, select the File tab then Open then Restore Session.
To revert to a previous version of an individual MCL file:
1. Select the File tab then Info.
2. In the Currently opened files list, select the relevant file and click the Reload link.

13.14 CURRENTLY OPENED FILES


Select the File tab then Info. Currently opened files are listed in order of when they were opened.

13.15 RECENTLY USED FILES


Select the File tab then Open. Recently used files are listed in order of when they were last used.
To reopen recently used MCL files at startup, select the File tab then Options and check the check box.

13.16 CLOSE FILES


To close a single file:
1. Select the File tab then Info.
2. In the Currently opened files list, select the relevant file and click the Close link.
To close all files that are open:
1. Select the File tab then Info.
2. Click Close All.

13.17 APPLICATION NOTE


This application note will explain how to use the GOOSE Configurator Tool in S1 Agile. You will be able to use the
tool to simplify GOOSE configuration and to see in a system all the GOOSE correlations between publishers and
subscribers. After reading this note you should be able to import MCL files as well as create, clone and subscribe a
new GOOSE control block.

Note:
At present only MiCOM compact and modular IEDs can be used with the S1 Agile tool.

P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6 95
Settings Application Software S1 Agile

13.17.1 CONFIGURING THE IED

IED 1 IED 2 IED 3 IED 4

V01827

Figure 19: Initial setup

To explain how to use GOOSE configurator we will create a system with three IEDs. We will have a GOOSE
published by IED 1 and it will be subscribed by IED 2 and IED 3. IED 4 will then be created directly on to the GOOSE
configurator.
The following steps will:
● Create a new publication from IED 4
● Subscribe to the newly published GOOSE on IED 1 and IED 2
● Clone a new publication on IED 3 which will then be subscribed to by IED 4

IED 1 IED 2 IED 3 IED 4

V01828

Figure 20: Final setup

96 P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6
S1 Agile Settings Application Software

To simplify the system the GOOSE publishing from IED 1 will include the Boolean value associated with Function
Key 1. The GOOSE published from IED 4 will contain Function Key 2.
The initial configuration for IED 1 covers the following:
● IED details
● Communications
● Dataset definition
● GOOSE control block

This is shown in the tables below:


SCL and IED Details
SCL File ID P44T
SCL File Version 2.37
Name IED1

Template Details
ICD Template P44T________03A.ICD
SCL Scheme Version V1.7
IEC 61850 Edition Edition 1
Description P44T Railway Protection
Type P44T
Configuration Revision P44Tv03A
Supported Models P44T???????030* (A)

Communications
Connected Sub-Network NONE
Access Point AP1

Address configuration
IP Address 192.168.0.1
SubNet Mask 255.255.255.0
Gateway Address 0.0.0.0

General configuration
Media Single Copper or Redundant (Fibre or Copper)
Ethernet Failover Disable
Failover Timeout 2.0
TCP Keepalive 5
Database Lock Timeout 15

System\LLN0\IED1_DS
Name IED1_DS
Location System\LLN0
Contents System/FnkGGIO1.ST.Ind1.st.Val

P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6 97
Settings Application Software S1 Agile

System\LLN0\gcb01
Multicast MAC Address 01 - 0C - CD – 01 – 00 - 00
Application ID (hex) 0
VLAN Identifier (hex) 0
VLAN Priority 4

Repeat message transmission parameters


Minimum Cycle Time 20 ms
Maximum Cycle Time 1s
Increment 900

Message Data parameters


GOOSE Identifier IED1System/LLN0$GO$gcb01
Dataset Reference IED1System/LLN0$IED1_DS
Configuration Revision 1

For IED 2 and IED 3 configuration is similar to IED 1. The tables below show you the configuration for GOOSE
Subscription:
System\GosGGIO1\Ind1.stVal
Multicast MAC Address 01 - 0C - CD – 01 – 00 - 00
Application ID (hex) 0

GOOSE Source parameters


Source Path IED1\System\FnkGGIO1\Ind1.stVal
GOOSE Identifier IED1System/LLN0$GO$gcb01
Dataset Reference IED1System/LLN0$IED1_DS
Configuration Revision 1
Data Obj Index/Type 1 Boolean
Quality Obj Index 1

13.17.2 EXPORTING A PRECONFIGURED SYSTEM TO GOOSE CONFIGURATOR


You can launch a preconfigured system to the GOOSE configurator by using the S1 tool.
1. Go to the S1 Agile Start Page and click on the Ethernet Configuration tile
2. Select the icon on the GOOSE Configurator tile

Note:
If a system is preconfigured or partially preconfigured it is easier to export the configuration to GOOSE configurator from the
system. Otherwise you will need to add each individual MCL file to the tool.

In the System Explorer window right click on System TEST and select Show Goose connections. You can then
select the MCL files that match the IEDs you want to export.
Device Name MCL File
Test/IED 1 IED1.mcl
Test/IED 2 IED2.mcl
Test/IED 3 IED3.mcl

98 P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6
S1 Agile Settings Application Software

When you have selected the files they will open and an existing connection will be drawn. The figure below shows
the chosen connections we described in the initial setup figure at the start of this note.

E01829

Figure 21: System exported into GOOSE configurator

13.17.3 ADDING A NEW IED TO THE GOOSE CONFIGURATOR


We can add a new MCL file to the GOOSE Configurator, but before we can add IED 4 we need to create the MCL file
using the IED Configurator.
1. Click on Tools and select IEC 61850 IED Configurator from the drop down menu
2. Create a new file from the template
3. In the Select Template using Model Number window select the model from the drop-down list
4. Change the file name to IED4 and make sure the IP address is listed as 192.168.0.4
5. To open the MCL file go back to Goose configurator then select > File > Open > Browse
6. Select the MCL file created for IED 4
IED 4 has now been added and is part of the scheme.

P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6 99
Settings Application Software S1 Agile

E01830

Figure 22: IED 4 added to scheme

13.17.4 CREATING A NEW GOOSE PUBLICATION


The next step is to create a new publication on IED 4. For this you will need to create the GOOSE control block
publishing information and the dataset.
1. Right click on the device to be configured and choose Publish a message or select the IED with a left click
and choose Publish a message from the tool bar
2. Select the GOOSE control block and choose the required communication parameters. Click Next

Note:
The parameters are not editable in GOOSE configurator so you will need to switch to IED configurator to edit these values
after they have been created.

GCB selection
GCB Name System\LLN0 > System\LLN0\gcb01
Multicast MAC Address 01 - 0C - CD – 01 – 00 - 00
Application ID (hex) 0
VLAN Identifier (hex) 0
VLAN Priority 4
Minimum Cycle Time 20
Maximum Cycle Time 1,000
Increment 900
Configuration Revision 0

100 P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6
S1 Agile Settings Application Software

The dataset is now created and Function key 2 is published.


From the published list select System > FnkGGIO1 > ST > Ind2 and from the tick list check stVal. The IED will now
publish by a blue line in front of IED 4. You can also see this by selecting Show published messages in the tool bar.

E01831

Figure 23: Publishing a GOOSE message

New publications will appear in the list, as shown in the table below:
Publishing IED Goose Control Block Message
IED1 System\LLN0\gcb01 System\FnkGGIO1.ST.Ind1.stVal
IED4 System\LLN0\gcb01 System\FnkGGIO1.ST.Ind2.stVal

You can export the publication to a spreadsheet by selecting Export to Excel on the tool bar or you can select the
publication and choose to delete it from the list.

13.17.5 GOOSE SUBSCRIPTION


The new GOOSE published by IED 4 will be subscribed to by IED 1 and IED 2. To subscribe right click on the
subscribing IED and select Subscribe to a message.
When the Subscribe to a message window opens find the data point and then drag it to the required GOOSE input
in the subscribing IED. When the subscription is complete a line will appear connecting the points and the
subscription will be visible in the view.

E01832

Figure 24: IED 1 subscribed to IED 4

P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6 101
Settings Application Software S1 Agile

E01833

Figure 25: Subscription completed on IED 1

This process can be repeated for IED 2 using the Subscribe to a message button on the tool bar. When the
subscription is complete IED 1 and 2 will have a connection to the blue line representing the GOOSE published by
IED 4.

102 P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6
S1 Agile Settings Application Software

E01834

Figure 26: GOOSE subscriptions to IED 4

13.17.6 CLONING OF A PUBLISHER


Data shared through GOOSE by IEDs of a similar type across a substation will be the same. You can simplify the
process by publishing one device, which can then be cloned to another device. In this example IED 3 uses the
same GOOSE publication as IED 4.
1. Right click IED 3 and click Clone publishing. You can also select IED 3 and use the Clone publishing button
on the tool bar.
2. In the Select publishing IED window select IED 4 publication. You will see the location of the file under File
Path and Yes under ICD Available
3. In the Select target publishing IED window select IED 3 as the destination for the cloning process. Again
the location will be displayed under File Path and Yes under ICD Available

P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6 103
Settings Application Software S1 Agile

E01835

Figure 27: IED 3 cloned publication

IED 4 will now subscribe to the message from IED 3. The diagram below shows the configuration as described in
the final setup diagram, which is located at the start of this note.

104 P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6
S1 Agile Settings Application Software

E01836

Figure 28: Final configuration

13.17.7 VIEW SUBSCRIPTIONS


To see all your subscriptions select Show GOOSE connections on the tool bar. In the summary table all the
configured GOOSE messages will be displayed. From this point you can either Export to Excel or unsubscribe.
Publisher Subscriber
IED GOOSE Control File IED File
Data Set Message GOOSE Subscribing Block
Name Block Path Name Path
IED1System/
IED1 System\LLN0\gcb01 System\FnkGGIO1\Ind1.stVal C:\... IED2 System\GosGGIO1\Ind1.stVal C:\...
LLN0$IED1_DS
IED1System/
IED1 System\LLN0\gcb01 System\FnkGGIO1\Ind1.stVal C:\... IED3 System\GosGGIO1\Ind1.stVal C:\...
LLN0$IED1_DS
IED4System/
IED4 System\LLN0\gcb01 System\FnkGGIO1\Ind2.stVal C:\... IED1 System\GosGGIO1\Ind1.stVal C:\...
LLN0$Dataset1
IED4System/
IED4 System\LLN0\gcb01 System\FnkGGIO1\Ind2.stVal C:\... IED2 System\GosGGIO1\Ind2.stVal C:\...
LLN0$Dataset1
IED3System/
IED3 System\LLN0\gcb01 System\FnkGGIO1\Ind2.stVal C:\... IED4 System\GosGGIO1\Ind1.stVal C:\...
LLN0$Dataset1

If you double click on the join between the blue and orange bar you will see a sub list of all your subscriptions from
the intersecting IEDs, as shown below.

P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6 105
Settings Application Software S1 Agile

E01837

Figure 29: Interconnection view

Select Save Session to save the diagram created GOOSE configurator. This will create a file extension “.gctsession”
which you can open in the future. This is useful as the GOOSE configurator takes MCLs from multiple S1 systems.
When you select Export the file will create a compressed version of “.gctsession” and the MCL files so they can
easily be shared with other users.
When you select Save All it will save the changes performed to the MCL files without creating a new GOOSE
configurator session. Select Open to see all the reverse actions for these features.

106 P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6
S1 Agile Settings Application Software

14 PHASOR TERMINAL
The Phasor Terminal (PMU Connection and Analysis) software tool is used to view and archive real-time IEEE
C37.118 synchrophasor data. Multiple PMUs can be quickly and easily configured, connected and graphically
compared.
Phasor Terminal can be connected with external devices using different types of transmission media and network
protocols. It can communicate with many devices simultaneously in real time and show the connection quality.

14.1 SYSTEM STABILITY


Electrical power systems are becoming ever more complex and therefore ever more difficult to manage. This is
due to various reasons, such as deregulation of the power industry, increasing requirements for high quality
reliable energy, and increased supply from renewable sources which provide unpredictable quantities of energy to
the grid. Also the grids of different countries and areas that were previously autonomous are becoming more
interconnected. This provides great advantages for power distribution across boundaries but creates several
energy management problems. Grid stability is therefore a major concern in the industry and a way of accurately
predicting out-of-step conditions is becoming essential.
If the power system cannot provide suitable flows between generator and load, this can cause frequency
instabilities. These instabilities can lead to underfrequency or overfrequency or out-of-step conditions, which often
cause blackouts. The resulting overvoltages cause excessive stress on the equipment, affecting their reliability or
operating life.

14.2 PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNITS


A Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU) can measure phasor quantities in real time. Measurements are timed to a
common GPS clock generating 1 pulse per second. These measurements are then communicated back to a
central Phasor Data Concentrator (PDC).

14.3 IEEE SYNCHROPHASOR STANDARD


The IEEE C37.118 standard defines synchronized phasor measurements used in power system applications. It
provides a method to quantify the measurement, specifies tests to ensure the measurement conforms to the
definition, and specifies error limits for the test. It also defines a data communication protocol, including message
formats for communicating this data in a real-time system.

14.4 HARDWARE INSTALLATION


The PC on which Phasor Terminal is installed must be set up to communicate with the PMU devices. This is done
using an Ethernet LAN, or directly using a serial connection (RS232). This document assumes the PMU devices to
which you want to connect have already been configured and are available for connection. You will need to know
the parameters of the connected devices.

14.5 USING THE MAIN WINDOW


The main Phasor Terminal window is blank until you create one or more PMU devices. Once you’ve installed a
device, information specific to that device is displayed. If you install more than one device, select the device from
the drop-down list.
To separate the Points Explorer window from the main window, double click its header bar. To return it to its
original position, double click its header bar again.
The status bar uses an icon to show the device name, connection mode and connection quality. When connected
it shows if data frames are received normally, stored as they are received or received with less than 10% of the
nominal frame rate. Hover the mouse over the icon to see the current and nominal frame rates.

P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6 107
Settings Application Software S1 Agile

14.6 CREATING A NEW DEVICE


To create a new device:
1. Click the Create new device configuration icon. The Edit device configuration dialog appears.
2. The Name field is blank and the other fields have default values. Edit these as required.
3. The Miscellaneous panel gives you the option to Autoconnect.
In most cases the device is connected to the Phasor Terminal over the LAN by Ethernet.
Any network layer (layer 3) protocol can be used but most systems use IP, in which case an IP address will have
been already assigned to the PMU device. A typical transport protocol would be TCP.
UDP is a protocol very similar to TCP but does not have the error-correcting abilities of TCP and it needs less
overhead. UDP is often sufficient for real-time streaming so is often used in this type of application. All settings are
the same as for TCP.
To connect by Ethernet:
1. Make sure the settings on the PMU tool host match the settings of the PMU device.
2. Make sure the name of the PMU tool host is set to localhost, or set the IP address of the PMU device.
3. The IEEE C37.118 standard specifies default port numbers for the network layer. By default, 4712 is used for
TCP and 4713 is used for UDP however these can be configured as required.
The Phasor Terminal also supports serially connected PMU devices. To connect by serial port:
1. Set Protocol to Serial.
2. The Serial Port fields have default values. Set these as required.

Note:
Restart the connection after applying a new device configuration.

14.7 EDITING AN EXISTING DEVICE CONFIGURATION


To edit an existing device configuration, select the device and click the Edit device configuration icon.
This is the same dialog as invoked by the Create new device configuration icon but with the fields populated with
existing parameters of the chosen device. You can change these as required.

14.8 MANAGE DEVICE CONNECTIONS


To view the configuration details of a device:
1. Select Connection then Devices.
2. The Management of devices window appears. The icons are identical to those in the main window but it
provides information about the devices and their connections.
To edit the configuration details of a device:
1. Select Connection then Devices.
2. In the Devices Explorer view, double click the device.
3. Edit the device configuration and click OK.

14.9 USING PHASOR TERMINAL


There are two main windows used to select and display acquired quantities, also known as Points. These windows
show the instantaneous current and voltage phasor magnitude measurements, and their associated phase angle
with reference to a GPS time signal. The Point Explorer panel tree structure allows you to select which points are
available for display and the Plot window shows the points selected in real time.

108 P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6
S1 Agile Settings Application Software

14.10 CHANGE A DEVICE NAME


To change a device name:
In the Point Explorer, select and edit the device name.

14.11 DISPLAYING QUANTITIES


A PMU can be wired to several different feeders at a substation and can send multiple channels of information
depending on the PMU configuration chosen. The PMU measures the voltage and current of each feeder, then
compares these with a GPS time reference to determine their phase angles. This information is sent back to the
control unit (in our case, the Phasor Terminal) in the form of phasors (voltages and currents with their associated
phase angles).
The PMU can send data at between 5 (minimum) and 50 (maximum) frames per second. To determine the data
rate, hover the cursor over the connection icon in the status bar. A data rate of 50 frames per second is the
maximum for 50 Hz power systems. Although the IEEE C37.118 standard specifies the data rates at which a PMU
device should send data, the phasor terminal accepts the data at whatever rate it is received.
This information can be displayed in two different ways: a polar chart or a time chart. A polar chart is the most
convenient, because you can easily display the magnitude and phase angle of the phasor. The magnitude is
represented by the length of the line and the phase angle is represented by the line’s angular deviation from the x-
axis. This is updated once every second.
You can display a trace, marked by the end of the phasor, which allows you to see a history of its behaviour. The
maximum and minimum quantity of the phasor is trapped as well as the instantaneous value. These are displayed
in a moveable legend.
Time charts can also be displayed if required. For example, the magnitude and phase of a phasor can be displayed
on different time charts, in a vertically tiled arrangement. This is updated in real time every second.

14.12 SELECTING ITEMS TO DISPLAY


To select which items to plot, select the item in the Point Explorer window and drag it into the plot window. It only
allows you to do this if it is a valid operation. For example you cannot drag a time-based item (magnitude or angle)
into a polar chart, and you cannot drag a polar-based function (phasor) into a time chart. If using a time chart, you
can have either the magnitudes of different phasors or the angles, but not both. You need a separate time chart
for the magnitude information and the angle information.
To display a quantity:
1. Select which quantity you want to display. The chart icon (polar or time) is enabled, depending on which
quantity you select.
2. Click the chart icon to open a blank chart.
3. Drag the quantity into the chart window.
4. You can display many quantities in one chart window. However, the quantities must be the same type.
To remove a quantity from a window:
1. Right-click the plot window.
2. Select Remove then select the item you want to remove.

14.12.1 CHANGING PLOT PROPERTIES


To change the scaling and alignment of the plot, right-click the plot window and select Plot properties.
Overlap chart refers to overlapping the legend over the chart.

14.12.2 DISPLAYING DATA IN A RELATIVE VIEW


You can choose a particular quantity as the reference to be used.

P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6 109
Settings Application Software S1 Agile

To display values in a relative view:


1. Create a plot with at least two quantities.
2. Right-click the plot window and select Data presentation.
3. Select the reference data source.

Note:
The reference quantity is underlined in the legend.

To switch back to the default raw data view:


1. Right-click the plot window and select Data presentation.
2. Select Raw data view.

14.12.3 CHANGING PLOT NAME


To change the plot name, right click the plot tab and select Rename tab.

14.13 VIEW DEVICE PROPERTIES


To view the properties of a device:
In the Point Explorer double-click the point’s name and the Point properties window appears. Parameters in black
can be edited.
If the phasor is defined in Cartesian coordinates, the angle is converted to radians automatically. However, if a
device sends angle values in Angle Units, the proper unit must be defined during the configuration process.
The timestamp Adjustment allows you to adjust for different time bases and affects all data points provided by a
device. It has a default value of 0 and can be added to the timestamp received from a device.

14.14 VIEW POINT PROPERTIES


To view the properties of a point:
In the Point Explorer double-click the point’s name and the Point properties window appears. Parameters in black
can be edited.
Value represents the magnitude of the phasor.
View mode allows you to select Peak or RMS and applies to the magnitude of the voltage phasors only.
If the Timestamp shift is not equal to 0, this means the device is sending incorrect timestamps. This could be due
to the clock being desynchronized from the GPS reference.

14.15 CONNECT TO A DEVICE


To connect to a device:
1. Select the device from the drop-down list on the main window’s toolbar, or from the tree in the Point
Explorer panel.
2. Click the Connect to the device icon.
The icon next to the device name in the Point Explorer and the connection indicator in the status bar both show
the connection status.

110 P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6
S1 Agile Settings Application Software

14.16 DISCONNECT FROM A DEVICE


To disconnect from a device:
1. Select the device from the drop-down list on the main window’s toolbar, or from the tree in the Point
Explorer panel.
2. Click the Disconnect from device icon.
You can also disconnect and reconnect in one operation using the Disconnect from device and reconnect icon.
This is used to reboot the connection in case of configuration changes.

14.17 CONTROL COMMANDS


The following commands control data collection:
● The Data ON icon requests the selected PMU device to start transmitting data.
● The Data OFF icon requests the selected PMU device to stop transmitting data.
● The Configuration request icon requests the selected device to send its configuration data.

Select Connection then Devices to view this data.

14.18 CAPTURING BINARY DATA


To start capturing data:
1. Click the Start dumping icon on the main window’s toolbar.
2. Browse the destination file and location and click Save. The file capture process then begins.
To stop capturing data:
Click the Stop dumping icon from the main window’s toolbar.

14.19 EXPORT DATA


The Phasor Terminal can export data to a MS Excel file using a wizard. This simplifies selection of the data range,
the time period and the destination file. It also allows you to define the quantities to be exported.
To export data to MS Excel format:
1. Select Tools then Export data from the main menu, or press CTRL+E.
2. Drag and drop the points to be exported into the right-hand pane, or use > and <. This sets them as Points
to Export. Click Next.
3. Select the time period and destination file.
4. Click Export. The progress bar shows when the process is complete.

Caution:
Do not try and export to Excel if you do not have Excel installed. This will crash the
application

14.20 MODIFY DATA ARCHIVE SETTINGS


The Archiving feature allows you to start collecting the data and placing it in a database file.

P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6 111
Settings Application Software S1 Agile

To start archiving:
1. Select Tools then Archivisation. The Archivisation setup dialog appears.
2. In the Db name field, enter the name of the SQLite database file.
3. In the Space management policy field, select one of the following:
None. The disk usage is not being monitored.
10% space left. The terminal checks to see if there is 10% of the total storage space available on the target
drive. If there is not enough space the oldest data is dropped to make more space available.
Grow to. Set the maximum space
4. Check the Collect Data checkbox and click Apply. Archiving continues until the allocated storage space is
reached or until you uncheck the Collect data check box and click Apply.

112 P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6
S1 Agile Settings Application Software

15 OFFLINE FAULT LOCATOR


The fault locator tool enables the user to model a power system network and, using the disturbance records
obtained during a fault (in COMTRADE form), find the location of the fault offline. The tool supports a network with
maximum 6 terminals and 4 junctions. Once a power system network is created, it can be saved and used to find
the fault locations simply by replacing the disturbance records. The welcome page of the Fault Locator tool has
three options:
1. New Network - creates a new network
2. Open Network - opens an existing network
3. Recent Networks - provides access to recently opened/created networks.
Once a network is created and saved, the user will be able to open that existing network and edit them as
required.

15.1 CREATE A NEW NETWORK


On the Welcome window, clicking the New Network button will immediately open a Save As file save window.
Enter a suitable network name into the File name: text entry box. The file will automatically be given a Network
Files (*.fln) file extension. Clicking the Save button will open the Fault Locator Properties: and Topology: window.
In Properties:, the Name of the network file and the Unit system are displayed. The name of the network file and
unit system may be changed.The unit system option may be km or miles.

Note:
The tool does not perform conversion between km and miles. It just provides an indication for the network parameter
accuracy. If km is selected as the preferred unit then all line parameters must be entered in km and if miles is selected, then all
line parameters must be entered in miles.

In Topology:, there are two buttons to enter details of nodes and lines. The NODES button will open the Define
terminals and junctions window, where all the terminals and junctions of the power system may be defined. The
LINES button will open the Define network Lines window, where all the line parameters may be defined. Lines
connect the terminals and junctions defined in the Nodes window, so terminals and junctions must be defined
before lines.

15.2 DEFINE NODES


A terminal is any node which has the current and voltage measurements from where the disturbance records are
obtained. A junction is any point that two terminals get connected (E.g. A busbar). These points will not usually
have its own current and voltage measurements and they are used as reference points in any system that has
more than two terminals.

Note:
There can only be a maximum of 6 terminals and 4 junctions. Each terminal in the system must have its current and voltage
measurements. A minimum of two terminals must be entered to make a valid system.

In the Fault Locator home window, click the NODES button, then in the Nodes window, clicking the ADD button
allows entry of terminal and/or junction details.
When the ADD button is clicked a New Node window will appear, providing a node Name entry text box and a
drop-down box for node Type. If the node Type is Terminal, then the VT Ratio, CT Ratio and Data Scaling (P/S)
text boxes and drop-down appear, allowing ratios and the format/data scaling comtrade (.cfg) file to be recorded.
These details are required to be accurately provided as input. Clicking the OK will add each Junction/Terminal to
the Node window list. To edit the selected node, click the EDIT button.

P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6 113
Settings Application Software S1 Agile

Type Name VT Ratio CT Ratio Data Scaling


(terminal/junction) (it should be unique) (V) (A) (Primary/Secondary)
Terminal T1 1,000.00 1,200.00 Primary
Terminal T2 1,000.00 1,200.00 Primary
Terminal T3 1,000.00 1,200.00 Primary
Junction J1

Once all the required terminals and junctions on the power system network are entered, the back button returns to
the Fault Locator home window.

Note:
It is advisable to save the network after any additions/modifications.

15.3 DEFINE LINES


A line is a defined connection between nodes.
In the Fault Locator home window, the LINES button will allow definition of the required line parameters
connecting the power system terminals and junctions.

Note:
Line definition requires terminals and junctions to be defined first.
All impedance and shunt susceptance values should be given per mile/km
CT and VT are not applicable for junction to junction lines
At least one line must be defined
Every terminal or junction must be connected to at least one terminal or junction

In the Define network lines window, click the ADD button, a New Line window will open allowing entry of details
required to be entered as part of line parameters:
From - This defines one end of the line. It can either be a terminal or a junction.
To - This defines the other end of the line. This can also be a terminal or a junction.
Imp. Magnitude - This is the magnitude of positive sequence impedance of the line in terms of ohms/km or ohms/
mile depending on which unit system the user created the system
Imp. Angle - This is the angle of positive sequence impedance of the line in degrees.
Shunt Susceptance - This is the magnitude of positive sequence Shunt Susceptance of the line in terms of S/km or
S/miles depending on which unit system the user created the system
Length - This is the length of the line in km or miles depending on which unit system selected in the Fault Locator
home window.
Click OK to add the Line to the Define network lines list. To edit the selected line, click the EDIT button.
Series Imp.Mag Series Imp.Ang Shunt Susceptance Length
From To
(ohms/km/mile) (° - degree) (S/km/mile) (miles/km/mile)
T1 T2 5.000000000 4.000000000 10.000000000 10.0

Once all required lines are added, the back button returns to the Fault Locator home window.

Note:
It is advisable to save the network after any additions/modifications.

114 P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6
S1 Agile Settings Application Software

15.4 NETWORK DESIGN REQUIREMENTS


Design requirements of power system networks modelled with this tool:
● Terminal or junction names must be unique. An error message will be displayed if the user tries to repeat
used names in a network.
● All the terminals and junctions specified in the Define terminals and junctions window must be connected in
the Define network lines window for the user to be able to save the model.
● In the Define network lines window always enter a terminal name in From column and the junction name in
the To column. Only exceptions are two ended systems and when connecting multiple junctions.
● When a system has multiple junctions always connect the junctions in a left to right order when creating
the table. If the network shown below at (a) as an example of correct connection and at (b) incorrect
connection of the terminals.

E01824

Figure 30: Two five terminal three junction power system networks

15.5 EXAMPLE NETWORKS


For any network that has less than two junctions, the order in which the terminals and junctions are entered in to
the system does not have any significance. Therefore, while creating the network for the following network
systems a specific order is not required.
● 2 terminals (Should not contain junctions)
● 3 terminals with 1 junction
● 4 terminals with 1 junction
● 5 terminals with 1 junction
● 6 terminals with 1 junction

For any other networks, the order must be correctly specified when creating the system.

Note:
It is advisable to simplify network topologies into diagrams similar to those used in the following examples, as this will
effectively identify the linearity of the network created. Therefore, reducing chances of making mistakes when creating
networks using this tool in left to right order. It is also good practise to make sure that the order of terminals and junctions
being created with the tool is maintained consistently when creating nodes and lines.

15.5.1 EXAMPLE 1
In the example below, a 6 terminal 4 junction network, the tool will expect the values to put in from left to right in a
linear order as specified before in this document. The first junction to line information entered will be counted as

P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6 115
Settings Application Software S1 Agile

the junction 1. It is imperative that the first input to the model should be the connection T1 to J1 or T2 to J1. In
addition to that, while creating nodes, the order must be maintained.

E01826

Figure 31: Example - simplified six terminal four junction network

Correctly entered nodes:


Type Name VT Ratio CT Ratio Data Scaling
(terminal/junction) (it should be unique) (V) (A) (Primary/Secondary)
Junction J1
Junction J2
Junction J3
Junction J4
Terminal T1 1,000.00 1,500.00 Primary
Terminal T2 1,000.00 1,500.00 Primary
Terminal T3 1,000.00 600.00 Primary
Terminal T4 1,000.00 1,200.00 Primary
Terminal T5 1,000.00 1,500.00 Primary
Terminal T6 1,000.00 1,200.00 Primary

Note:
Terminals and junctions are defined in order

Correctly entered lines:


Series Imp.Mag Series Imp.Ang Shunt Susceptance Length
From To
(ohms/km/mile) (° - degree) (S/km/mile) (miles/km/mile)
T1 J1 0.501250000 77.280000000 0.000003440 100.0
T2 J1 0.501250000 77.280000000 0.000003440 40.0
T3 J2 0.501250000 77.280000000 0.000003440 10.0
J1 J2 0.501250000 77.280000000 0.000003440 32.0
J2 J3 0.501250000 77.280000000 0.000003440 32.0
T4 J3 0.501250000 77.280000000 0.000003440 40.0
T5 J4 0.501250000 77.280000000 0.000003440 40.0

116 P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6
S1 Agile Settings Application Software

T6 J4 0.501250000 77.280000000 0.000003440 20.0

Note:
The first terminal and junction line entered will be counted as junction 1.

Incorrectly entered nodes:


Type Name VT Ratio CT Ratio Data Scaling
(terminal/junction) (it should be unique) (V) (A) (Primary/Secondary)
Terminal T3 1,000.00 600.00 Primary
Terminal T4 1,000.00 1,200.00 Primary
Terminal T5 1,000.00 1,500.00 Primary
Terminal T6 1,000.00 1,200.00 Primary
Junction J1
Junction J2
Junction J3
Junction J4
Terminal T1 1,000.00 1,500.00 Primary
Terminal T2 1,000.00 1,500.00 Primary

Note:
T1 &T2 should be created before T3, T4, T5 or T6.

Incorrectly entered lines:


Series Imp.Mag Series Imp.Ang Shunt Susceptance Length
From To
(ohms/km/mile) (° - degree) (S/km/mile) (miles/km/mile)
T3 J2 0.501250000 77.280000000 0.000003440 10.0
J1 J2 0.501250000 77.280000000 0.000003440 32.0
J2 J3 0.501250000 77.280000000 0.000003440 32.0
J3 J4 0.501250000 77.280000000 0.000003440 50.0
T4 J3 0.501250000 77.280000000 0.000003440 40.0
T5 J4 0.501250000 77.280000000 0.000003440 40.0
T6 J4 0.501250000 77.280000000 0.000003440 20.0
T1 J1 0.501250000 77.280000000 0.000003440 100.0
T2 J1 0.501250000 77.280000000 0.000003440 40.0

Note:
The first junction entered is J2, so J2 will be considered to be in the position of J1.

15.5.2 EXAMPLE 2
In the example below, a 5 terminal 3 junction network, the tool will expect the values to put in from left to right in a
linear order as specified before in this document. The first junction to line information entered will be counted as

P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6 117
Settings Application Software S1 Agile

the junction 1. It is imperative that the first input to the model should be the connection T1 to J1 or T2 to J1. In
addition to that, while creating nodes, the order must be maintained.

(BB1) (BB3) (BB4)

E01825

Figure 32: Example - simplified five terminal three junction network

Correctly entered nodes:


Type Name VT Ratio CT Ratio Data Scaling
(terminal/junction) (it should be unique) (V) (A) (Primary/Secondary)
Junction J1
Junction J2
Junction J3
Terminal T1 1,000.00 1,500.00 Primary
Terminal T2 1,000.00 1,500.00 Primary
Terminal T5 1,000.00 1,500.00 Primary
Terminal T3 1,000.00 1,500.00 Primary
Terminal T4 1,000.00 1,200.00 Primary

Note:
Terminals and junctions are defined in order

Correctly entered lines:


Series Imp.Mag Series Imp.Ang Shunt Susceptance Length
From To
(ohms/km/mile) (° - degree) (S/km/mile) (miles/km/mile)
T1 J1 0.424375000 74.970000000 0.000002868 10.0
T2 J1 0.424375000 74.970000000 0.000002868 5.0
J1 J2 0.424375000 74.970000000 0.000002868 32.0
T5 J2 0.424375000 74.970000000 0.000002868 40.0
J2 J3 0.424375000 74.970000000 0.000002868 50.0
T3 J3 0.424375000 74.970000000 0.000002868 40.0
T4 J3 0.424375000 74.970000000 0.000002868 20.0

Note:
The first terminal and junction line entered will be counted as junction 1.

Incorrectly entered nodes:

118 P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6
S1 Agile Settings Application Software

Type Name VT Ratio CT Ratio Data Scaling


(terminal/junction) (it should be unique) (V) (A) (Primary/Secondary)
Terminal T5 1,000.00 600.00 Primary
Terminal T4 1,000.00 1,200.00 Primary
Terminal T3 1,000.00 1,500.00 Primary
Junction J1
Junction J2
Junction J3
Terminal T1 1,000.00 1,500.00 Primary
Terminal T2 1,000.00 1,500.00 Primary

Note:
T1 &T2 should be created before T3, T4 or T5.

Incorrectly entered lines:


Series Imp.Mag Series Imp.Ang Shunt Susceptance Length
From To
(ohms/km/mile) (° - degree) (S/km/mile) (miles/km/mile)
J2 J3 0.424375000 74.970000000 0.000002868 50.0
T5 J3 0.424375000 74.970000000 0.000002868 40.0
T3 J3 0.424375000 74.970000000 0.000002868 40.0
T4 J3 0.424375000 74.970000000 0.000002868 20.0
T1 J1 0.424375000 74.970000000 0.000002868 10.0
T2 J1 0.424375000 74.970000000 0.000002868 5.0
J1 J2 0.424375000 74.970000000 0.000002868 32.0

Note:
The first junction entered is J2, so J2 will be considered to be in the position of J1.

15.6 LOCATE FAULTS


To associate the current and voltage measurements obtained for each terminal, click the LOCATE FAULTS… button
on the Fault Locator home window to open the Select COMTRADE files for terminals window..
Terminal Path
T1

T2

To upload the COMTRADE files for each terminal, either double-click on the required Terminal entry, or click the
folder icon for the terminal entry required. Then navigate to and select the required COMTRADE file (.cfg).
To clear all associated COMTRADE file paths, click the CLEAR COMTRADE PATHS button. To change an associated
COMTRADE file path, simply select a different file.

P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6 119
Settings Application Software S1 Agile

Note:
The COMTRADE channel selected for each terminal should have 3 phase voltages and 3 phase currents of that terminal. So, in
total there should only be 6 analogue channels. In addition, the .cfg file should contain correct unit, phase and rating
information. If any details are missing or incorrect, the tool will be unable to take in values accurately form the COMTRADE file
and results will be incorrect.

With all required terminal(s) associated with corresponding COMTRADE file(s), click the START ALGORITHM button
to find the fault location.
The final fault location information about detected fault consists of the line section or junction where the fault
occurred and the faulty phases. In order to understand how to interpret the location of the fault, the user needs to
understand all 5 different pieces of information displayed on the final output. The explanation for the contents
displayed in the result view is as given below:
Node 1 - This is one end of the line on which the fault is identified.
Distance 1 - This is the distance of the fault from Node 1 (Units will either be in km or miles depending on the
selection made by the user on the homepage).
Node 2 - This is the other end of the line on which the fault is identified.
Distance 2 - This is the distance of the fault from Node 2 (Units will either be in km or miles depending on the
selection made by the user on the homepage).
Fault Phases - The phases that the fault affected.
In the example below, the fault is on the line segment T1J1 and the fault location is 0.41km away from T1 and
31.59km away from J1. The fault is on phase A.
Node 1 Distance 1 (km/miles) Node 2 Distance 2 (km/miles) Fault Phases
T1 0.41 J1 31.59 Fault is on phase A

In the example below, the fault is on junction J1 and so node 1 and node 2 indicate the same location and both
distance 1 and distance 2 are 0.00. The fault is on phases C and A.
Node 1 Distance 1 (km/miles) Node 2 Distance 2 (km/miles) Fault Phases
J1 0.00 J1 0.00 Fault is on phase C and phase A

15.6.1 COMTRADE REQUIREMENTS


COMTRADE files used to upload to this tool need to satisfy the following conditions:
● The number of analogue channels on each terminal should exactly be 6. Those 6 channels are Va, Vb, Vc, Ia,
Ib and Ic. The algorithm only requires these channels to compute the fault location.
● The order these channels (Va, Vb, Vc, Ia, Ib and Ic) can be different. However, if they are recorded in different
order then on .cfg file, the phase identification and channel units should be present, because it will assume
that it is recorded in phase A-B-C order for voltages and currents.
● Switch on to Fault cannot be identified. The beginning of the disturbance record or the COMTRADE file
should have some nominal operating information before the fault, shown below.

120 P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6
S1 Agile Settings Application Software

E01807

Figure 33: An acceptable COMTRADE file--for a terminal where the first disturbance is the fault

● An unacceptable format is shown in the figure below, where there is a blank period before the system
information starts. If the COMTRADE file contains such blank space before the recorded voltage and current
information begins, then the inception of recorded current and voltage point will be perceived as the fault
point, which will result in an incorrect result being produced.

Where there is no voltage or current available the algorithm will


interpret it as normal operation as it detects the first change.

E01808

Figure 34: An Unacceptable COMTRADE file--where there is a blank period before the system voltage and
current details

● The inception of the fault on all the COMTRADE files recorded at different terminals should be within a cycle.
The maximum variation between the COMTRADE files can be one cycle. If the faults occur at two different
time points and the difference is greater than 1 cycle, then the output of the tool will be wrong.
● COMTRADE files should be stored in ASCII format.

Note:
COMTRADE files saved in Binary format are not compatible with this tool.

P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6 121
Settings Application Software S1 Agile

15.7 NETWORK TOPOLOGIES AND RESTRICTIONS


Generally, faults on power system networks containing up to 6 terminals and 4 junctions can be accurately
located using this tool. However, there are some requirements.
● Each terminal should only be connected to 1 junction (They cannot be connected to multiple junctions or to
other terminals unless it is a two-terminal system).
● If the line length is shorter than 10km the accuracy of the algorithm may not be less than 2% as claimed.
● If the faults on the line occur close to the ends (<1km) of the line (either too close to terminal or junction), the
fault section identification and fault distance identification may be inaccurate.
● Fault location detection would work accurately for solid faults. If they are resistive faults and if the fault
resistance is above 50 Ohms, the fault location detection may be inaccurate.

Note:
When creating networks that contain more than 3 terminals and 1 junction, it is advisable to reference networks detailed in
the Supported Topologies section.

15.8 LOOPED NETWORKS


It is vital that the topology of the power system network is linear and not looped. In the four terminal one junction
system, shown below, the power system network shown on (a) is the type of accepted four terminal one junction
system. If a user tries to create a topology as shown on (b), then the tool will give an error message warning that
network validation has failed and that the network is cyclic. The reason for this is because the connections can
only be linear, and they cannot be looped (a terminal can only be connected to one junction). In a nutshell when
junctions are present, terminals cannot be directly connected. They can only be connected to each other through
junctions (An exception is a two-terminal system).

T2

E01823

Figure 35: Example - two different four terminal one junction power system networks

Another type of looped network is shown below, the power system shown on (a) and (b) don’t have terminals
directly connected to each other as in the example above. However, on the topology as shown on (b), junctions are
interconnected therefore it is still considered as looped network. Hence, the tool will give an error message
warning that network validation has failed and that the network is cyclic, when attempting to create such a
network.

122 P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6
S1 Agile Settings Application Software

E01824

Figure 36: Example - two different five terminal three junction power system networks

15.9 SUPPORTED TOPOLOGIES


Supported topologies compatible with this tool are detailed in this section. While creating the topology, it is
advisable that existing networks be matched to the network topologies given here.

15.9.1 TWO TERMINAL NETWORK


Two terminals are connected together and protection relays are placed at either end to record the respective
voltages and currents, example below.

E01809

Figure 37: Example - two terminal network

15.9.2 THREE TERMINAL ONE JUNCTION NETWORK


A typical three terminal system would normally be connected through one junction. In the example below, busbar
3 (BB3) acts as a junction for terminals T1, T2 and T3. It is important note that BB3 is does not have any line length,
hence it is defined as a junction.

P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6 123
Settings Application Software S1 Agile

E01810

Figure 38: Example - three terminal one junction network

15.9.3 THREE TERMINAL TWO JUNCTION NETWORK


A three terminal system with two junctions, shown in the example below, with, busbar 3 (BB3) acting as a junction
for terminals T1 and T2 and busbar 2 (BB2) connected to T3 acting as the second junction. Note the line section
that connects the two junctions (BB2 and BB3).

E01811

Figure 39: Example - three terminal two junction network

15.9.4 FOUR TERMINAL ONE JUNCTION NETWORK


Like the three terminal one junction network, a four-terminal network with one junction is also connected by one
busbar (BB1 in this case), which acts as a junction. Busbars that act as junctions do not have any length to them,
whereas lines (Lines 6, 7, 8 & 9) that connect to the junction do have their own lengths.

124 P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6
S1 Agile Settings Application Software

E01812

Figure 40: Example - four terminal one junction network

15.9.5 FOUR TERMINAL TWO JUNCTION NETWORK


In a four terminals system with two junctions there will be line section connecting two junctions, shown in the
example below.

E01813

Figure 41: Example - four terminal two junction network

15.9.6 FOUR TERMINAL THREE JUNCTION NETWORK


In a four terminals system with three junctions, shown below, Busbar 2 (BB2), Busbar 3 (BB3) and Busbar 6 (BB6).
Following the left to right order, BB3 should be assigned as junction1, BB2 as junction2 and BB6 as junction3. T1
and T2 are connected to junction 1, T3 connected to Junction 2 and T4 connected to Junction 3.

P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6 125
Settings Application Software S1 Agile

E01814

Figure 42: Example - four terminal three junction network

15.9.7 FIVE TERMINAL ONE JUNCTION NETWORK


Like other one junction networks, all five terminals will be connected to one Busbar (BB2), shown below.

E01815

Figure 43: Example - five terminal one junction network

15.9.8 FIVE TERMINAL TWO JUNCTION NETWORK


In the five terminal and two junction network, shown below. T1, T2 and T3 are connected to busbar 1 (BB1), which
acts as one junction. Terminals T4 and T5 are connected to BB3 and then BB1 and BB3 are connected by Line 7.

126 P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6
S1 Agile Settings Application Software

E01816

Figure 44: Example - five terminal two junction network

15.9.9 FIVE TERMINAL THREE JUNCTION NETWORK


In the five terminal three junction network, shown below. Three junctions are BB1, BB3 and BB4. Terminal T1 and T2
are connected to BB1 and terminals T3 and T4 are connected to BB4 and Terminal T5 is connected BB3. Line 7
connects BB1 and BB3 and line 10 connects BB3 and BB4.

E01817

Figure 45: Example - five terminal three junction network

15.9.10 FIVE TERMINAL FOUR JUNCTION NETWORK


In the five terminal four junction network, shown below. Four junctions are BB2, BB3, BB6 and BB7. Terminal T1 and
T2 are connected to BB3 and terminal T3 connected to BB2, and terminal T4 is connected to BB6 and Terminal T5
is connected BB7. Line 8 connects BB3 and BB2, Line 12 connects BB2 and BB6 and line 13 connects BB6and BB7.

P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6 127
Settings Application Software S1 Agile

E01818

Figure 46: Example - five terminal four junction network

15.9.11 SIX TERMINAL ONE JUNCTION NETWORK


Like other one junction networks, all the terminals will be connected to one busbar, which acts as a junction (BB2 in
this example).

E01819

Figure 47: Example - six terminal one junction network

15.9.12 SIX TERMINAL TWO JUNCTION NETWORK


In the six terminal two junction network, given below. T1, T2, T3 and T4 are connected to junction BB2 and T5 and
T6 are connected to Junction BB1.

128 P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6
S1 Agile Settings Application Software

E01820

Figure 48: Example - six terminal two junction network

15.9.13 SIX TERMINAL THREE JUNCTION NETWORK


In the six terminal three junction network, given below. T1 and T2 are connected to junction BB2, T3 and T4 are
connected junction BB1 and T5 and T6 are connected to Junction BB3. BB2 is connected to BB1 by Line 6 and BB1
is connected to BB3 by Line7.

E01821

Figure 49: Example - six terminal three junction network

15.9.14 SIX TERMINAL FOUR JUNCTION NETWORK


In the six terminal four junction network, given below. T1 and T2 are connected to junction BB2, T3 is connected to
Junction BB1 and T4 is connected junction BB3 and T5 and T6 are connected to Junction BB4. BB2 is connected to
BB1 by Line 6 and BB1 is connected to BB3 by Line7 and BB3 is connected to BB4 by line 10.

P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6 129
Settings Application Software S1 Agile

E01822

Figure 50: Example - six terminal four junction network

130 P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6
S1 Agile Settings Application Software

16 REDUNDANT ETHERNET CONFIGURATOR


The Redundant Ethernet Configurator tool is intended for MiCOM Px4x IEDs with redundant Ethernet using PRP
(Parallel Redundancy Protocol), HSR (High-availability Seamless Redundancy), RSTP (Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol)
or Failover. This tool is used to identify IEDs, switch between PRP, HSR, RSTP and Failover, configure their
parameters, configure the redundancy IP address, or configure the SNTP IP address.

16.1 CONNECTING THE IED TO A PC


Connect the IED to the PC on which the Configurator tool is used. This connection is done through an Ethernet
switch or through a media converter.

RJ45

Ethernet switch
Media
Converter
TXA RXA TXB RXB

TX RX

RXA TXA RXB TXB RXA TXA RXB TXB

IED IED

(a) (b)
V01806

Figure 51: Connection using (a) an Ethernet switch and (b) a media converter

16.2 INSTALLING THE CONFIGURATOR


The Redundant Ethernet Configurator is installed as part of S1 Agile 2.0.1 onwards.

P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6 131
Settings Application Software S1 Agile

16.3 STARTING THE CONFIGURATOR


To start the configurator:
1. Go to S1 Agile and select the Ethernet Configuration tile, then select the Redundant Ethernet
Configurator tile.
2. The Login screen appears. For user mode login, enter the Login name as User and click OK with no
password. This level allows for IP address changes only. For Admin mode login, enter the Login name as
Admin and password Admin and click OK. This level allows for network protocol configurations.
3. If the login screen does not appear, check all network connections.
4. From the Network Board drop-down list select the Network Board, IP Address and MAC Address of the PC in
which the Configurator is running.

16.4 DEVICE IDENTIFICATION


To configure the redundant Ethernet board, go to the main window and click the Identify Device button. A list of
devices are shown with the following details:
● Device address
● MAC address
● Version number of the firmware
● SNTP IP address
● Date & time of the real-time clock, from the board.

Select the device you wish to configure. The MAC address of the selected device is highlighted.

16.5 SELECTING THE DEVICE MODE


You must now select the device mode that you wish to use. This will be either PRP, HSR, RSTP or Failover. To do this,
select the appropriate radio button then click the Update button. You will be asked to confirm a device reboot.
Click OK to confirm.

16.6 FILTER BY BOARD TYPE


Once the list has been populated you can use the filter option to show only Process Bus cards or Station Bus cards
by selecting the appropriate checkbox.

16.7 PASSWORD CONFGURATION


To assign a password the current password needs to be input first, then a new password can be given. The default
password is AAAA.
If the password does not follow NERC rules a message will be shown. Click on the NERC Rules button to review the
rules.
If the password is not known then the password can be recovered by using the Recover Password button and
following the instructions.

16.8 IP ADDRESS CONFIGURATION


To change the network address component of the IP address:
1. From the main window click the IP Config button. The Device setup screen appears.
2. Enter the required board IP address and click OK. This is the network address for the redundancy card, not
the IED IP address, which is set in the IED Configurator or DNP3.0 over Ethernet section.
3. The board network address is updated and displayed in the main window.

132 P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6
S1 Agile Settings Application Software

16.9 SNTP IP ADDRESS CONFIGURATION


If using SNMP to poll information from the REB an SNTP server can be used to synchronise the time of the reported
messages. To configure the SNTP server IP address:
1. From the main window click the SNTP Config button. The Device setup screen appears.
2. Enter the required MAC SNTP address and server IP SNTP Address. Click OK.
3. The updated MAC and IP SNTP addresses appear in the main screen.

16.10 CHECK MAC TABLE FOR CONNECTED EQUIPMENT


To check what devices are connected to the device being monitored:
1. From the main window, select the device.
2. Click the MAC Table button.
3. At the bottom of the main window, a box shows the ports where devices are connected and their MAC
addresses.

16.11 PRP CONFIGURATION


To view or configure the PRP Parameters:
1. Ensure that you have set the device mode to PRP.
2. Click the PRP/HSR Configuration button. The PRP Configuration Parameters screen appears.
3. To view the available parameters, click the Get PRP Parameters button.
4. To change the parameters, click the Set Parameters button and modify their values.
If you need to restore the default values of the parameters, click the Restore Defaults button.
The configurable parameters are as follows:
● Multicast Address: Use this field to configure the multicast destination address. All DANPs in the network
must be configured to operate with the same multicast address for the purpose of network supervision.
● Node Forget Time: This is the time after which a node entry is cleared in the nodes table.
● Life Check Interval: This defines how often a node sends a PRP_Supervision frame. All DANPs shall be
configured with the same Life Check Interval.

16.12 HSR CONFIGURATION


To view or configure the HSR Parameters:
1. Click the PRP/HSR Configuration button. The HSR Configuration Parameters screen appears.
2. To view the available parameters in the board that is connected, click the Get HSR Parameters button.
3. To change the parameters, click the Set HSR Parameters button and modify their values.
If you need to restore the default values of the parameters, click the Restore Defaults button.
The configurable parameters are as follows:
● Multicast Address: Use this field to configure the multicast destination address. All DANPs in the network
must be configured to operate with the same multicast address for the purpose of network supervision.
● Node Forget Time: This is the time after which a node entry is cleared in the nodes table.
● Life Check Interval: This defines how often a node sends a PRP Supervision frame. All DANPs must be
configured with the same Life Check Interval.

P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6 133
Settings Application Software S1 Agile

● Proxy Node Table Forget Time: This is the time after which a node entry is cleared in the ProxyTable.
● Proxy Node Table Max Entries: This is the maximum number of entries in the ProxyTable.
● Entry Forget Time: This is the time after which an entry is removed from the duplicates.
● Node Reboot Interval: This is the minimum time during which a node that reboots remains silent.

16.13 RSTP CONFIGURATION


1. To view or configure the RSTP Bridge Parameters, from the main window, click the device address to select
the device. The selected device MAC address appears highlighted.
2. Click the RSTP Configuration button. The RSTP Configuration screen appears.
3. To view the available parameters in the board that is connected, click the Get RSTP Parameters button.
4. To set the configurable parameters such as Bridge Max Age, Bridge Hello Time, Bridge Forward Delay, and
Bridge Priority, modify the parameter values according to the following table and click Set RSTP
Parameters.
Maximum value
S.No Parameter Default value (second) Minimum value (second)
(second)
1 Bridge Max Age 20 6 40
2 Bridge Hello Time 2 1 10
3 Bridge Forward Delay 15 4 30
4 Bridge Priority 32768 0 61440

16.14 BRIDGE PARAMETERS


To read the RSTP bridge parameters from the board,
1. From the main window click the device address to select the device. The RSTP Configuration window
appears and the default tab is Bridge Parameters.
2. Click the Get RSTP Parameters button. This displays all the RSTP bridge parameters from the Ethernet
board.
3. To modify the RSTP parameters, enter the values and click Set RSTP Parameters.
4. To restore the default values, click Restore Default and click Set RSTP Parameters.
The grayed parameters are read-only and cannot be modified.

Note:
When assigning the bridge priority, make sure the root of the network is the Ethernet switch, not the IEDs. This reduces the
number of hops to reach all devices in the network. Also make sure the priority values for all IEDs are higher than that of the
switch.

16.15 PORT PARAMETERS


This function is useful if you need to view the parameters of each port.
1. From the main window, click the device address to select the device. The RSTP Configuration window
appears.
2. Select the Port Parameters tab, then click Get Parameters to read the port parameters. Alternatively, select
the port numbers to read the parameters.

134 P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6
S1 Agile Settings Application Software

16.16 PORT STATES


This is used to see which ports of the board are enabled or disabled.
1. From the main window, click the device address to select the device. The RSTP Configuration window
appears.
2. Select the Port States tab then click the Get Port States button. This lists the ports of the Ethernet board. A
tick shows they are enabled.

16.17 FAILOVER CONFIGURATION


To view or configure the Failover Parameters:
Click the Failover Configuration button. The Failover Configuration screen appears.
1. To view the available parameters in the board that is connected, click the Get Failover Parameters button.
2. To change the parameters, click the Set Failover Parameters button and modify their values.
If you need to restore the default values of the parameters, click the Restore Defaults button. The configurable
parameters are as follows:
● Port A and Port B select your main port for the Failover (Port A is the port at the top of your REB).
● The Failover time defines how long it takes for the redundancy switch over to trigger. The minimum value is
2s.

16.18 FILTERING DATABASE


The Filtering Database is used to determine how frames are forwarded or filtered across the Redundant Ethernet
Board (REB). Filtering information specifies the set of ports to which frames received from a specific port are
forwarded. The REB examines each received frame to see if the frame's destination address matches a source
address listed in the Filtering Database. If there is a match, the device uses the filtering/forwarding information for
that source address to determine how to forward or filter the frame. Otherwise the frame is forwarded to all the
ports in the REB.

General tab
The Filtering Database contains two types of entry; static and dynamic. The Static Entries are the source addresses
entered by an administrator. The Dynamic Entries are the source addresses learnt by the switch process. The
Dynamic Entries are removed from the Filtering Database after the Ageing Time. The Database holds a maximum
of 1024 entries.
1. To access the forwarding database functions, if required, click the Filtering Database button in the main
window
2. To view the Forwarding Database Size, Number of Static Entries and Number of Dynamic Entries, click Read
Database Info
3. To set the Ageing Time, enter the number of seconds in the text box and click the Set button

Filtering Entries tab


The Filtering Entries section allows to set the Static MAC addresses and read dynamic ones. This will likely not be
used in any application.

Goose Filtering tab


The Filtering entries section allows to set the Static MAC addresses and read dynamic ones. This will likely not be
used in any application. The GOOSE Filtering allows to filter GOOSE from being received based on Multicast MAC
addresses. This can be done either by clicking on the checkboxes or by typing the desired range.

P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6 135
Settings Application Software S1 Agile

16.19 END OF SESSION


To finish the session:
1. In the main window, click the Quit button, a new screen appears.
2. If a database backup is required, click Yes, a new screen appears.
3. Click the ... button to browse the path. Enter the name in the text box.

136 P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6
S1 Agile Settings Application Software

17 PRP/HSR CONFIGURATOR
The PRP/HSR Configurator tool is intended for MiCOM Px4x IEDs with redundant Ethernet using PRP (Parallel
Redundancy Protocol), or HSR (High-availability Seamless Redundancy). This tool is used to identify IEDs, switch
between PRP and HSR or configure their parameters, configure the redundancy IP address, or configure the SNTP
IP address.

17.1 CONNECTING THE IED TO A PC


Connect the IED to the PC on which the Configurator tool is used. This connection is done through an Ethernet
switch or through a media converter.

RJ45

Ethernet switch
Media
Converter
TXA RXA TXB RXB

TX RX

RXA TXA RXB TXB RXA TXA RXB TXB

IED IED

(a) (b)
V01806

Figure 52: Connection using (a) an Ethernet switch and (b) a media converter

17.2 STARTING THE CONFIGURATOR


To start the configurator:
1. Select the Configurator from the Windows Programs menu.
2. The Login screen appears. For user mode login, enter the Login name as User and click OK with no
password.
3. If the login screen does not appear, check all network connections.
4. The main window appears. In the bottom right-hand corner of the main window, click the Language button
to select the language.
5. The Network Board drop-down list shows the Network Board, IP Address and MAC Address of the PC in
which the Configurator is running.

P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6 137
Settings Application Software S1 Agile

17.3 PRP/HSR DEVICE IDENTIFICATION


To configure the redundant Ethernet board, go to the main window and click the Identify Device button. A list of
devices are shown with the following details:
● Device address
● MAC address
● Version number of the firmware
● SNTP IP address
● Date & time of the real-time clock, from the board.

Select the device you wish to configure. The MAC address of the selected device is highlighted.

17.4 SELECTING THE DEVICE MODE


You must now select the device mode that you wish to use. This will be either PRP or HSR. To do this, select the
appropriate radio button then click the Update button. You will be asked to confirm a device reboot. Click OK to
confirm

17.5 PRP/HSR IP ADDRESS CONFIGURATION


To change the network address component of the IP address:
1. From the main window click the IP Config button. The Device setup screen appears.
2. Enter the required board IP address and click OK. This is the redundancy network address, not the IEC 61850
IP address.
3. The board network address is updated and displayed in the main window.

17.6 SNTP IP ADDRESS CONFIGURATION


To configure the SNTP server IP address:
1. From the main window click the SNTP Config button. The Device setup screen appears.
2. Enter the required MAC SNTP address and server IP SNTP Address. Click OK.
3. The updated MAC and IP SNTP addresses appear in the main screen.

17.7 CHECK FOR CONNECTED EQUIPMENT


To check what devices are connected to the device being monitored:
1. From the main window, select the device.
2. Click the Equipment button.
3. At the bottom of the main window, a box shows the ports where devices are connected and their MAC
addresses.

17.8 PRP CONFIGURATION


To view or configure the PRP Parameters:
1. Ensure that you have set the device mode to PRP.
2. Click the PRP/HSR Configuration button. The PRP Configuration Parameters screen appears.
3. To view the available parameters, click the Get PRP Parameters button.
4. To change the parameters, click the Set Parameters button and modify their values.
If you need to restore the default values of the parameters, click the Restore Defaults button.

138 P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6
S1 Agile Settings Application Software

The configurable parameters are as follows:


● Multicast Address: Use this field to configure the multicast destination address. All DANPs in the network
must be configured to operate with the same multicast address for the purpose of network supervision.
● Node Forget Time: This is the time after which a node entry is cleared in the nodes table.
● Life Check Interval: This defines how often a node sends a PRP_Supervision frame. All DANPs shall be
configured with the same Life Check Interval.

17.9 HSR CONFIGURATION


To view or configure the HSR Parameters:
1. Click the PRP/HSR Configuration button. The HSR Configuration Parameters screen appears.
2. To view the available parameters in the board that is connected, click the Get HSR Parameters button.
3. To change the parameters, click the Set HSR Parameters button and modify their values.
If you need to restore the default values of the parameters, click the Restore Defaults button.
The configurable parameters are as follows:
● Multicast Address: Use this field to configure the multicast destination address. All DANPs in the network
must be configured to operate with the same multicast address for the purpose of network supervision.
● Node Forget Time: This is the time after which a node entry is cleared in the nodes table.
● Life Check Interval: This defines how often a node sends a PRP Supervision frame. All DANPs must be
configured with the same Life Check Interval.
● Proxy Node Table Forget Time: This is the time after which a node entry is cleared in the ProxyTable.
● Proxy Node Table Max Entries: This is the maximum number of entries in the ProxyTable.
● Entry Forget Time: This is the time after which an entry is removed from the duplicates.
● Node Reboot Interval: This is the minimum time during which a node that reboots remains silent.

17.10 FILTERING DATABASE


The Filtering Database is used to determine how frames are forwarded or filtered across the Redundant Ethernet
Board (REB). Filtering information specifies the set of ports to which frames received from a specific port are
forwarded. The REB examines each received frame to see if the frame's destination address matches a source
address listed in the Filtering Database. If there is a match, the device uses the filtering/forwarding information for
that source address to determine how to forward or filter the frame. Otherwise the frame is forwarded to all the
ports in the REB.

General tab
The Filtering Database contains two types of entry; static and dynamic. The Static Entries are the source addresses
entered by an administrator. The Dynamic Entries are the source addresses learnt by the switch process. The
Dynamic Entries are removed from the Filtering Database after the Ageing Time. The Database holds a maximum
of 1024 entries.
1. To access the forwarding database functions, if required, click the Filtering Database button in the main
window
2. To view the Forwarding Database Size, Number of Static Entries and Number of Dynamic Entries, click Read
Database Info
3. To set the Ageing Time, enter the number of seconds in the text box and click the Set button

Filtering Entries tab


The Filtering Entries section allows to set the Static MAC addresses and read dynamic ones. This will likely not be
used in any application.

P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6 139
Settings Application Software S1 Agile

Goose Filtering tab


The Filtering entries section allows to set the Static MAC addresses and read dynamic ones. This will likely not be
used in any application. The GOOSE Filtering allows to filter GOOSE from being received based on Multicast MAC
addresses. This can be done either by clicking on the checkboxes or by typing the desired range.

17.11 END OF SESSION


To finish the session:
1. In the main window, click the Quit button, a new screen appears.
2. If a database backup is required, click Yes, a new screen appears.
3. Click the ... button to browse the path. Enter the name in the text box.

140 P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6
S1 Agile Settings Application Software

18 RSTP CONFIGURATOR
The RSTP Configurator tool is intended for MiCOM Px4x IEDs with redundant Ethernet using RSTP (Rapid Spanning
Tree Protocol). This tool is used to identify IEDs, configure the redundancy IP address, configure the SNTP IP
address and configure the RSTP parameters.

18.1 CONNECTING THE IED TO A PC


Connect the IED to the PC on which the Configurator tool is used. This connection is done through an Ethernet
switch or through a media converter.

RJ45

Ethernet switch
Media
Converter
TXA RXA TXB RXB

TX RX

RXA TXA RXB TXB RXA TXA RXB TXB

IED IED

(a) (b)
V01806

Figure 53: Connection using (a) an Ethernet switch and (b) a media converter

18.2 STARTING THE CONFIGURATOR


To start the configurator:
1. Select the Configurator from the Windows Programs menu.
2. The Login screen appears. For user mode login, enter the Login name as User and click OK with no
password.
3. If the login screen does not appear, check all network connections.
4. The main window appears. In the bottom right-hand corner of the main window, click the Language button
to select the language.
5. The Network Board drop-down list shows the Network Board, IP Address and MAC Address of the PC in
which the Configurator is running.

P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6 141
Settings Application Software S1 Agile

18.3 RSTP DEVICE IDENTIFICATION


To configure the redundant Ethernet board, go to the main window and click Identify Device.

Note:
Due to the time needed to establish the RSTP protocol, wait 25 seconds between connecting the PC to the IED and clicking the
Identify Device button.

The redundant Ethernet board connected to the PC is identified and its details are listed.
● Device address
● MAC address
● Version number of the firmware
● SNTP IP address
● Date & time of the real-time clock, from the board

18.4 RSTP IP ADDRESS CONFIGURATION


To change the network address component of the IP address,
1. From the main window click the IP Config button.
2. The Device Setup screen appears showing the IP Base Address. This is the board redundancy network
address, not the IEC 61850 IP address.
3. Enter the required board IP address.
4. Click OK. The board network address is updated and displayed in the main window.

18.5 SNTP IP ADDRESS CONFIGURATION


To configure the SNTP server IP address:
1. From the main window click the SNTP Config button. The Device setup screen appears.
2. Enter the required MAC SNTP address and server IP SNTP Address. Click OK.
3. The updated MAC and IP SNTP addresses appear in the main screen.

18.6 CHECK FOR CONNECTED EQUIPMENT


To check what devices are connected to the device being monitored:
1. From the main window, select the device.
2. Click the Equipment button.
3. At the bottom of the main window, a box shows the ports where devices are connected and their MAC
addresses.

18.7 RSTP CONFIGURATION


1. To view or configure the RSTP Bridge Parameters, from the main window, click the device address to select
the device. The selected device MAC address appears highlighted.
2. Click the RSTP Configuration button. The RSTP Configuration screen appears.
3. To view the available parameters in the board that is connected, click the Get RSTP Parameters button.
4. To set the configurable parameters such as Bridge Max Age, Bridge Hello Time, Bridge Forward Delay, and
Bridge Priority, modify the parameter values according to the following table and click Set RSTP
Parameters.

142 P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6
S1 Agile Settings Application Software

Maximum value
S.No Parameter Default value (second) Minimum value (second)
(second)
1 Bridge Max Age 20 6 40
2 Bridge Hello Time 2 1 10
3 Bridge Forward Delay 15 4 30
4 Bridge Priority 32768 0 61440

18.7.1 BRIDGE PARAMETERS


To read the RSTP bridge parameters from the board,
1. From the main window click the device address to select the device. The RSTP Configuration window
appears and the default tab is Bridge Parameters.
2. Click the Get RSTP Parameters button. This displays all the RSTP bridge parameters from the Ethernet
board.
3. To modify the RSTP parameters, enter the values and click Set RSTP Parameters.
4. To restore the default values, click Restore Default and click Set RSTP Parameters.
The grayed parameters are read-only and cannot be modified.

Note:
When assigning the bridge priority, make sure the root of the network is the Ethernet switch, not the IEDs. This reduces the
number of hops to reach all devices in the network. Also make sure the priority values for all IEDs are higher than that of the
switch.

18.7.2 PORT PARAMETERS


This function is useful if you need to view the parameters of each port.
1. From the main window, click the device address to select the device. The RSTP Configuration window
appears.
2. Select the Port Parameters tab, then click Get Parameters to read the port parameters. Alternatively, select
the port numbers to read the parameters.

18.7.3 PORT STATES


This is used to see which ports of the board are enabled or disabled.
1. From the main window, click the device address to select the device. The RSTP Configuration window
appears.
2. Select the Port States tab then click the Get Port States button. This lists the ports of the Ethernet board. A
tick shows they are enabled.

18.8 END OF SESSION


To finish the session:
1. In the main window, click the Quit button, a new screen appears.
2. If a database backup is required, click Yes, a new screen appears.
3. Click the ... button to browse the path. Enter the name in the text box.

P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6 143
Settings Application Software S1 Agile

19 SWITCH MANAGER
Switch Manager is used to manage Ethernet ring networks and MiCOM H35x-V2 and H36x-V2 SNMP facilities. It is
a set of tools used to manage, optimize, diagnose and supervise your network. It also handles the version software
of the switch.
The Switch Manager tool is also intended for MiCOM Px4x IEDs with redundant Ethernet using Self Healing Protocol
(SHP) and Dual Homing Protocol (DHP). This tool is used to identify IEDs and GE Switches, and to configure the
redundancy IP address for the GE proprietary Self Healing Protocol and Dual Homing Protocol.

Switch hardware
GE switches are stand-alone devices (H3xx, H6x families) or embedded in a computer device rack, for example
MiCOM C264 (SWDxxx, SWRxxx, SWUxxx Ethernet boards) or PC board (MiCOM H14x, MiCOM H15x, MiCOM H16x).

Switch range
There are 3 types of GE switches:
● Standard switches: SWU (in C264), H14x (PCI), H34x, H6x
● Redundant Ring switches: SWR (in C264), H15x (PCI), H35x,
● Redundant Dual Homing switches: SWD (in C264), H16x (PCI), H36x

Switch Manager allows you to allocate an IP addresses for GE switches. Switches can then be synchronized using
the Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) or they can be administrated using the Simple Network Management
Protocol (SNMP).
All switches have a single 6-byte MAC address.

Redundancy Management
Standard Ethernet does not support a loop at the OSI link layer (layer 2 of the 7 layer model). A mesh topology
cannot be created using a standard Hub and switch. Redundancy needs separate networks using hardware in
routers or software in dedicated switches using STP (Spanning Tree Protocol). However, this redundancy
mechanism is too slow for one link failure in electrical automation networks.
GE has developed its own Redundancy ring and star mechanisms using two specific Ethernet ports of the
redundant switches. This redundancy works between GE switches of the same type. The two redundant Ethernet
connections between GE switches create one private redundant Ethernet LAN.
The Ethernet ports dedicated to the redundancy are optical Ethernet ports. The GE redundancy mechanism uses a
single specific address for each Ethernet switch of the private LAN. This address is set using DIP switches or
jumpers.
Switch Manager monitors the redundant address of the switches and the link topology between switches.

19.1 INSTALLATION

Switch Manager requirements


● PC with Windows XP or later
● Ethernet port
● 200 MB hard disk space
● PC IP address configured in Windows in same IP range as switch

Network IP address
IP addressing is needed for time synchronization of GE switches and for SNMP management.

144 P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6
S1 Agile Settings Application Software

Switch Manager is used to define IP addresses of GE switches. These addresses must be in the range of the system
IP, depending on the IP mask of the engineering PC for substation maintenance.
GE switches have a default multicast so the 3rd word of the IP address is always 254.

19.2 SETUP
1. Make sure the PC has one Ethernet port connected to the GE switch.
2. Configure the PC's Ethernet port on the same subnet as the GE switch.
3. Select User or Admin mode. In User mode enter the user name as User, leave the password blank and click
OK. In Admin mode you can not upload the firmware on the Ethernet repeaters.
4. In Admin mode enter the user name as Admin, enter the password and click OK. All functions are available
including Expert Maintenance facilities.
5. Click the Language button in the bottom right of the screen and select your language.
6. If several Ethernet interfaces are used, in the Network board drop-down box, select the PC Network board
connected to the GE switch. The IP and MAC addresses are displayed below the drop-down box.
7. Periodically click the Ring Topology button (top left) to display or refresh the list of GE switches that are
connected.

19.3 NETWORK SETUP


To configure the network options:
1. From the main window click the Settings button. The Network Setup screen appears.
2. Enter the required board IP address. The first two octets can be configured. The third octet is always 254.
The last octet is set using the DIP switches (SW2) on the redundant Ethernet board, next to the ribbon
connector.
3. Click OK. The board network address is updated and displayed in the main window.
4. From the main window click the SNTP Config button. The Device setup screen appears.
5. Enter the required MAC SNTP Address and server IP SNTP Address. Click OK.
6. The updated MAC and IP SNTP addresses appear in the main screen.
7. Click the Saturation button. A new screen appears.
8. Set the saturation level and click OK. The default value is 300.

19.4 BANDWIDTH USED


To show how much bandwidth is used in the ring,
Click the Ring% button, at the bottom of the main window. The percentage of bandwidth used in the ring is
displayed.

19.5 RESET COUNTERS


To reset the switch counters,
1. Click Switch Counter Reset.
2. Click OK.

P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6 145
Settings Application Software S1 Agile

19.6 CHECK FOR CONNECTED EQUIPMENT


To check what devices are connected to the device being monitored:
1. From the main window, select the device.
2. Click the Equipment button.
3. At the bottom of the main window, a box shows the ports where devices are connected and their MAC
addresses.

19.7 MIRRORING FUNCTION


Port mirroring is a method of monitoring network traffic that forwards a copy of each incoming and outgoing
packet from one port of the repeater to another port where the data can be studied. Port mirroring is managed
locally and a network administrator uses it as a diagnostic tool.
To set up port mirroring:
1. Select the address of the device in the main window.
2. Click the Mirroring button, a new screen appears.
3. Click the checkbox to assign a a mirror port. A mirror port copies the incoming and outgoing traffic of the
port.

19.8 PORTS ON/OFF


To enable or disable ports:
1. Select the address of the device in the main window.
2. Click Ports On/Off, a new screen appears.
3. Click the checkbox to enable or disable a port. A disabled port has an empty checkbox.

19.9 VLAN
The Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) is a technique used to split an interconnected physical network into several
networks. This technique can be used at all ISO/OSI levels. The VLAN switch is mainly at OSI level 1 (physical VLAN)
which allows communication only between some Ethernet physical ports.
Ports on the switch can be grouped into Physical VLANs to limit traffic flooding. This is because it is limited to ports
belonging to that VLAN and not to other ports.
Port-based VLANs are VLANs where the packet forwarding decision is based on the destination MAC address and
its associated port. You must define outgoing ports allowed for each port when using port-based VLANs. The VLAN
only governs the outgoing traffic so is unidirectional. Therefore, if you wish to allow two subscriber ports to talk to
each other, you must define the egress port for both ports. An egress port is an outgoing port, through which a
data packet leaves.
To assign a physical VLAN to a set of ports:
1. Select the address of the device in the main window.
2. Click the VLAN button, a new screen appears.
3. Use the checkboxes to select which ports will be in the same VLAN. By default all the ports share the same
VLAN.

146 P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6
S1 Agile Settings Application Software

19.10 END OF SESSION


To finish the session:
1. In the main window, click the Quit button, a new screen appears.
2. If a database backup is required, click Yes, a new screen appears.
3. Click the ... button to browse the path. Enter the name in the text box.

P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6 147
Settings Application Software S1 Agile

20 AE2R
Automatic Extraction of Event Records (AE2R) automatically reads event files from the communication ports of GE
devices with either the Courier protocol or the IEC 60870‑5‑103 protocol.
AE2R is configured with an initialisation file. This file contains all settings, file names and file directories needed for
configuration. This file can be created and edited using a standard text editor.
Once configured, event files can be automatically extracted according to a schedule by creating a batch file and
feeding it to the windows Task Scheduler or other mechanisms that can run batch files periodically. This procedure
is outside the scope of the manual.
AE2R also has a tool that allows setting simple passwords (for relays that support cybersecurity phase 1 or in other
words, relays that have AAAA as default level 3 password) and test the communications to ensure the initialisation
file has been properly configured. The command line can be used to manually execute the AE2R application on
demand.

20.1 INITIALISATION FILE


The first step is to create or edit the initialisation file (AE2R.INI) with a text editor such as Microsoft® Notepad. It
needs to be configured for each application and for the communication requirements of the connected devices.
The AE2R.INI file contains 3 sections: the common section headed [AE2R_GENERAL], the communications section
that can be serial [AE2R_SERIAL], through a modem [AE2R_MODEM] or via Ethernet [AE2R_ETHERNET] and finally
the password section [AE2R_PASSWORDS]. Section entries are only included when non-default values are needed.
There is a demo .ini file installed in the AE2R installation folder that can be used as a guide.

20.2 COMMON SECTION


The common section is formed from the following options:
Permissible Default
Function Description Parameter Type
Values/Strings Value
The error log file name must contain only valid
filename characters. The name may contain
spaces. When ErrorLogPathname is set to a
blank string the path name is as follows. If S1
Agile is installed then the default directory is
ErrorLogPathname String <blank string>
the AE2R subdirectory in the root directory for
the event files as set by S1 Agile. If it is not
installed then the default is the directory
defined by EventRootDir. The file name in both
circumstances is AE2R_Errors.log.
EventRootDir is ignored if S1 Agile is installed
on the same PC as AE2R. If S1 Agile is installed
the root directory for the event files is set by S1
EventRootDir String <blank string>
Agile. When EventDir is set to a blank string
the directory containing the AE2R executable
is used.
This parameter indicates whether an Ethernet
connection is to be used:
UseEthernet Integer 0 or 1 0
1 - Ethernet connection
0 - direct COM port or Modem connection
Any valid COM1 (when
This parameter specifies the COM port to be communication CommPort key
CommPort String
used. Ignored if UseEthernet is set to 1. port string, e.g. name does
COM1 not exist)

148 P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6
S1 Agile Settings Application Software

Permissible Default
Function Description Parameter Type
Values/Strings Value
Ignored if UseEthernet is set to 1. This value
can normally be confirmed from the
BaudRate Integer Any valid Baud rate 9600
connection parameter of the relay in the S1
Agile system
Ignored if UseEthernet is set to 1. This value 0 or 1
can normally be confirmed from the
ElevenBits Integer 1-11 bits 1
connection parameter of the relay in the S1
Agile system. 0-10 bits

The time interval used by Courier between


receiving a BUSY response and sending a
BusyHoldoff subsequent POLL BUFFER command. It only Integer 0 to 65535 50
affects RS485 daisy chains used in rear port
connections
The maximum number of BUSY responses that
will be accepted for a single Courier
transaction before aborting the transaction. To
cope with abnormal situations where a device
is not replying correctly to requests, a limit is
BusyCount Integer 0 to 65535 100
placed on the number of BUSY responses that
should be accepted. Without this limit the link
to the device would be stuck in a loop. It only
affects RS485 daisy chains used in rear port
connections
The maximum time from sending the last byte
of a Courier Reset Remote Link message to
receiving the first byte of a response. When
ResetResponse Integer 0 to 65535 100
that time has elapsed, the request is aborted.
The recommended value for all connections is
1000ms.
The maximum time from a sending the last
byte of a Courier message to receiving the first
byte of a response. When that time has
Response Integer 0 to 65535 0 to 65535
elapsed the request is aborted. The Response
Time parameter is used for all messages
except Courier Reset Remote Link messages.
The number of tries before aborting the
TryCount Integer 0 to 65535 3
request.
The minimum delay that is put between
receiving a response and transmitting the next
request. Transmit delay is normally set to zero
TransmitDelay but can be set to a few milliseconds when Integer 0 to 65535 5
using half duplex communication. This gives
the other end of the link time to change from
transmitting to receiving
The minimum delay that is put between
GlobalTransmit transmitting a global message and the next Integer 0 to 65535 10
transmission.
0 or 1
Integer
1 - modem
Defines whether the connection is going Ignored if
UseModem connection 0
through a modem or not. UseEthernet is set to
0 - direct COM port
1
connection

P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6 149
Settings Application Software S1 Agile

Permissible Default
Function Description Parameter Type
Values/Strings Value
This key entry must be set the name of the
modem. The name should be exactly as it
TAPI_ModemName String <blank string>
appears in the Windows modem setup dialog.
Ignored if UseModem is set to 0.
This parameter is ignored for most modems.
TAPI_LineAddress The value is required by specific modems. Integer 0
Ignored if UseModem is set to 0.
A valid telephone
number. Commas
TAPI_NumberToDial Ignored if UseModem is set to 0. String may be used to <blank string>
indicate a one
second delay.
0 or 1
1 - TAPI_AreaCode
and
TAPI_CountryCode
TAPI_UseCountryAndAreaCodes Ignored if UseModem is set to 0. Integer are used 0
0 - TAPI_AreaCode
and
TAPI_CountryCode
are not used
A valid area code
telephone number.
Commas may be
TAPI_AreaCode Ignored if UseModem is set to 0. String <blank string>
used to
indicate a one
second delay.
A valid country
code telephone
number. Commas
TAPI_CountryCode Ignored if UseModem is set to 0. String <blank string>
may be used to
indicate a one
second delay.

20.3 COMMUNICATIONS SECTION


The communications section is formed from the following options:
Parameter Permissible Default
Function Description
Type Values Value
Enables polling of events on a serial port. This section is used if
UseEthernet in section [AE2R_GENERAL] is set to 0 and UseModem
<No
in section [AE2R_GENERAL] is set to 0. Each section entry in the
AE2R_SERIAL Integer 1 to 254 default
[AE2R_SERIAL] section defines the device address for one device.
value>
The first key name is AE000, the second AE001, and so on to
AE999.
This section is used if UseEthernet in section [AE2R_GENERAL] is
set to 0 and UseModem in section [AE2R_GENERAL] is set to 1. <No
AE2R_MODEM Each section entry in the [AE2R_MODEM] section defines the Integer 1 to 254 default
device address for one device. The first key name is AE000, the value>
second AE001, and so on to AE999.
This section is ignored if UseEthernet in section [AE2R_GENERAL] is
set to 0. Each section entry in the [AE2R _ETHERNET] section
AE2R_ETHERNET
defines the Ethernet connection parameters for one device. The
first key name is AE000, the second AE001, and so on to AE999.

150 P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6
S1 Agile Settings Application Software

20.4 SETTING THE PASSWORD


To set the password on the .ini file:
1. Navigate to the installation folder of S1 Agile and locate the AE2R folder. The default location is C:\Program
Files (x86)\GE\MiCOM S1 Agile\AE2R.
2. Run AE2R Config.exe
3. When prompted, select the browse option and open the .ini file
4. Click on the Change button
5. Set the cybersecurity phase 1 password for the relay, typically the default is AAAA. On a non-cybersecurity
or bypassed relay, select the option to disable the password.
6. Use the Test button to verify the .ini file is correct and the password has been set properly.

Note:
This is not applicable to RBAC cybersecurity relays, unless the password is bypassed.

20.5 RUNNING AE2R


There are three different ways to run AE2R:
● Running AE2R from the Windows command line:

1. Type command in the Windows search bar and right click on the Command Prompt, select Run as
Administrator.
2. Once in the command line, navigate to the location of AE2R. If installed in the default installation folder use
the following command cd C:\Program Files (x86)\GE\MiCOM S1 Agile\AE2R.
3. Type AE2R.exe AE2R_ini_file.ini where AE2R_ini_file.ini is the name of the .ini file.
● Running AE2R from a batch file:

1. Create a text file using notepad and type AE2R.exe AE2R_ini_file.ini where AE2R_ini_file.ini is the name of
the .ini file. Save the file in the default AE2R installation folder.
2. Change the extension of the file from .txt to .bat.
3. Feed the batch file to any program desired, normally this would be a task scheduler.
● Running AE2R from a shortcut:

1. Navigate to the default installation AE2R folder.


2. Right click on AE2R.exe and create a shortcut.
3. Right click on the shortcut and select Properties.
4. In the Target section add at the end the name of the .ini file, this is equivalent to using the .ini file as an
argument when running the executable.
5. When running the shortcut, it is advised to run it as administrator.
The default AE2R installation folder pathway is:
C:\Program Files (x86)\GE\MiCOM S1 Agile\AE2R.

20.6 INSPECTING THE EXTRACTED EVENT FILES


After the files have been extracted using AE2R, they are saved in C:\ProgramData\GE\MiCOM S1 Agile\S1 Security
Events\AE2R. Navigate to this folder to retrieve the event files.

P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6 151
Settings Application Software S1 Agile

21 AEDR2
AutoExtract Disturbance Records 2 (AEDR2) automatically reads COMTRADE disturbance records from the rear
serial communication ports GE devices with either the Courier protocol or the IEC 60870‑5‑103 protocol.
AEDR2 is configured with an initialisation file. This file contains all settings, file names and file directories needed
for configuration. This file can be created and edited using a standard text editor. Log files are also defined in the
initialisation file which are used by AEDR2 to record a history of events and errors.
Once configured, disturbance records are automatically extracted according to a schedule from devices
connected in a defined range of addresses. This is done using the Windows® Scheduled Task facility which can be
used to execute one or several schedules. All new disturbance records are saved to a user-defined drive and
filename.
AEDR2 also has a test function to ensure the initialisation file has been properly configured. The command line is
used to execute the test function and validate the initialisation file. The command line can also be used to
manually execute the AEDR2 application on demand.
WinAEDR2 is a management facility for AEDR2. It shows the history of all previous extractions and has shortcut
buttons to launch WaveWin, Windows Explorer and the Scheduled Task facility. It can also be used to view log files,
and edit and test the initialisation file.

21.1 INITIALISATION FILE


First of all you need to create or edit the initialisation file (AEDR2.INI) with a text editor such as Microsoft® Notepad.
It needs to be configured for each application and for the communication requirements of the connected devices.
The AEDR2.INI file contains 3 sections: the common section headed [AEDR2], the Courier section headed [Courier]
and the IEC 60870-5-103 section headed [IEC-103]. Section entries are only included when non-default values are
needed.

21.1.1 COMMON SECTION


Function Description Values Default
ErrorLogFileName Filename of Error Log Valid filename 1 Error.log
ExtractionLogFileName Filename of Extraction Log Valid filename 1 Extraction.log
StatusLogFileName Filename of Status Log Valid filename 1 Status.log
ComtradeName Used to create Comtrade short filenames Part of valid filename 2 DR
ComtradeDir Where to store the resulting Comtrade files Valid directory 1 empty
ComtradeFormat Defines Comtrade format 1991 or 1999 1999
1 indicates that any device not found between MinAddress and
ReportMissingDevices 0 or 1 3 0
MaxAddress is reported as "not found" in the Error Log
LongFileNames 1 indicates Comtrade long filenames 0 or 1 4 0
LFN_TCode For long filenames, defines the Time Zone with respect to UTC Valid time zone 0z
For long filenames, the substation name or code where the
LFN_Substation Part of valid filename empty
originating device is located
LFN_Company The company of the specified substation Part of valid filename empty

Use full pathnames for files or directories (e.g. "C:\Directory\SubDir"). If relative paths are used, they are assumed to
be relative to the directory in which the applications are installed.
Short filenames use the following format:
DEV_XX_TIMESTAMP
DEV identifies the device – C for Courier or I for IEC 60870-5-103 followed by the 3-digit device address.

152 P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6
S1 Agile Settings Application Software

For example 061001,231941657,0z,South Park,C001,Stafford Power,,,,.DAT


XX denotes the value of the ComtradeName key
TIMESTAMP expresses the date and time when the disturbance was recorded, in the format YYYY-MM-DD--HH-
MM-SS. For example,
C001_DR_2006-10-01--23-19-41.DAT
Function Value Description
0 Missing devices are not reported as errors.
ReportMissingDevices
1 Arrange all device addresses consecutively without gaps.
0 Records are saved using the short file name format.
LongFileNames
1 Records are saved using the long file name format as defined by the IEEE.

21.1.2 COURIER SECTION


Key Purpose Values Default
MinAddress Minimum device address 1 to 254 1 empty
MaxAddress Maximum device address 1 to 254 1 empty
CommPort Which COM port to use Valid COM port 2 COM1
BaudRate Baud rate to use Valid baud rate 9600
ElevenBits Ten or Eleven bits 0 or 1 3 1
BusyHoldoff Standard Courier parameter Integer 50
BusyCount ditto Integer 100
ResetResponse ditto Integer 100
Response ditto Integer 100
TryCount ditto Integer 3
TransmitDelay ditto Integer 5
GlobalTransmit ditto Integer 10
UseModem Whether to use a Modem 0 or 1 0
TAPI_ModemName Modem Name String empty
TAPI_LineAddress Line Address Integer 0
TAPI_NumberToDial Number to Dial String empty
TAPI_UseCountryAndAreaCodes Whether to use Country/Area codes Integer 0
API_AreaCode Area Code to dial String empty
TAPI_CountryCode Country Code to dial String empty
ALL
or NONE
Defines which devices (if any) uses Secondary Port
SecondaryPort or a sequence of 4 NONE
extraction
numbers
e.g. 1,4,77,12

The MinAddress and MaxAddress entries must either be both included or both omitted. If included, MaxAddress
must be greater than MinAddress. All Courier addresses between MinAddress and MaxAddress (inclusive) are tried.
If omitted, no Courier address is tried.
Both Courier and IEC 60870-5-103 disturbance extraction can use the same COM port. This is because all Courier
devices are polled first, each time the AEDR2 application runs, followed by all IEC 60870-5-103 devices.

P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6 153
Settings Application Software S1 Agile

If ElevenBits = 0, serial data is set to 1 start bit, 8 data bits, no parity and 1 stop bit.
If ElevenBits = 1, serial data is set to 1 start bit, 8 data bits, even parity and 1 stop bit.
Secondary Port Extraction means the disturbance records can be read from the device but not deleted.
Primary Port Extraction means that disturbance records are deleted from the device once read. The value
SecondaryPort can be set in one of three ways:
● NONE All devices are connected using their primary port.
● ALL All devices use the secondary port upload mechanism.
● <comma separated list of device addresses> e.g. 11,4,5,23,121

If the value is a list of addresses, the listed addresses use the secondary port upload mechanism. All other
addresses between MinAddress and MaxAddress use the standard primary port Courier disturbance record
method of extraction.
A device connected to AEDR2 through its primary port, but set using its primary port to free its secondary port,
operates as if it were connected to its secondary port. A device connected to AEDR2 through its secondary port,
but set using its secondary port to free its primary port, fails to upload records and the same record is uploaded
repeatedly.

21.1.3 IEC 60870-5-103 SECTION


Key Purpose Possible Values Default
MinAddress Minimum device address 0 .. 254 1 empty
MaxAddress Maximum device address 0 .. 254 1 empty
CommPort Which COM port to use Valid COM port COM1
BaudRate Baud rate to use Valid baud rate 9600
ElevenBits Ten or Eleven bits 0 or 1 2 1
Defines where the DMod directory is
DModDirectory Valid directory 3 see note
found
ALL
Defines which devices (if any) have
LeaveInDevice or NONE 4 NONE
disturbance records left in
or a sequence of numbers e.g. 1,4,77,12
ComtradeDataFormat Defines the Comtrade data format BINARY or ASCII ASCII

The MinAddress and MaxAddress entries must either be both included or both omitted. If included, MaxAddress
must be greater than MinAddress. All IEC 60870-5-103 addresses between MinAddress and MaxAddress (inclusive)
are tried. If omitted, no IEC 60870-5-103 address is tried.
If ElevenBits = 0, serial data is set to 1 start bit, 8 data bits, no parity and 1 stop bit.
If ElevenBits = 1, serial data is set to 1 start bit, 8 data bits, even parity and 1 stop bit.
The DModDirectory value defines where the DMod files are. This is used for the descriptions of the signals in the
disturbance records.
The default directory is:
C:\Program Files\GE\MiCOM S1 Agile\S&R-103\DMod
"Leave in Device" means that the disturbance records can be read from the device but not deleted. Otherwise,
disturbance records are deleted from the device once read. The value LeaveInDevice can be set in one of three
ways:
● NONE (all records are extracted and deleted)
● ALL (no records will be deleted from devices)
● <comma separated list of device addresses> e.g. 11,4,5,23,121

154 P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6
S1 Agile Settings Application Software

If the value is a list of addresses, the disturbance records of the listed addresses are left after extraction. For all
other addresses between MinAddress and MaxAddress, records are extracted and deleted.

21.1.4 EXAMPLE INI FILE


The following is an example of an INI file for a serial connection on COM 1 and for a 103 connection using a
modem.
[AEDR2]
ErrorLogFileName = TestError.log
ExtractionLogFileName = TestExtraction.log
StatusLogFileName = TestStatus.log
ComtradeDir = C:\Project\AEDR2\WinAEDR2
ReportMissingDevices = 1
LongFileNames = 1
LFN_Substation = "South Park"
LFN_Company = "Stafford Power"
ComtradeFormat = 1999

[Courier]
CommPort = COM1
BaudRate = 19200
ElevenBits = 1
MinAddress = 1
MaxAddress = 2
SecondaryPort = 1,3,5

[IEC-103]
CommPort = COM1
BaudRate = 115200
ElevenBits = 1
MinAddress = 1
MaxAddress = 2
LeaveInDevice = ALL
DModDirectory = C:\Program Files\GE\MiCOM S1 Agile\S&R-103\DMod
ComtradeDataFormat = ASCII
UseModem = 0
TAPI_ModemName = Standard 56000 bps Modem
TAPI_NumberToDial = 01223503445
Clicking in the Edit .ini file button for the first time opens a default file.

21.2 CONNECTION
The PC running AEDR2 can be connected to either to the Rear Port 1 or the Rear Port 2 (if fitted) of a Courier device.
AEDR2 can not be used with the front port of Px40 IEDs. Rear Port 1 allows the disturbance records to be extracted
or saved. Rear Port 2 can only save disturbance records. Extracted records are saved to the local PC then deleted
from the device. Saved records are copied to the local PC but not deleted from the device. AEDR2 can extract or
save disturbance records from IEC 60870-5-103 devices. It maintains a list of previously extracted records so it can
only extract such records once. Devices using IEC 60870-5-103 and Courier use a single direct connection to the
same or different COM ports. Devices using Courier can also connect using a modem link. AEDR2 can run on more
than one COM port but it needs to be run separately for each, with each port or modem using its own initialisation
file.

21.3 OPERATION
AEDR2 scans all the Courier and IEC 60870-5-103 device addresses in a specified range. If it does not find a device
at an address it goes to the next address. You only need to specify the lowest and highest addresses, even if there
are devices missing in the sequence.

P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6 155
Settings Application Software S1 Agile

AEDR2 does not keep a list of known devices. Each time it runs, it scans all addresses in the specified range. You
can add new devices or remove existing devices and AEDR2 extracts disturbance records from all addresses it
finds in the range each time it operates.
If a device is found at an address in the specified range and an error is found while extracting a record, the error is
reported to a log file.
When executed directly or by the Scheduled Task facility, the AEDR2 application runs invisibly in the background,
without the WinAEDR2 interface running. The only communication between AEDR2 and WinAEDR2 is through three
log files written by AEDR2 which are as follows:

Error Log
This contains errors reported by the Courier or IEC 60870‑5‑103 transfer mechanisms, or errors caused by missing
devices. Each entry contains date, time and an error description.

Extraction Log
This has an entry for every record that is uploaded. Each entry contains date, time, communication type, device
address, trigger date and time information.

Status Log
This file has one line showing the time and date that AEDR2 was last run. The Status Log is overwritten each time
AEDR2 is run.

21.4 DISTURBANCE RECORD FILES


For each disturbance record, a set of two or three files are created in standard COMTRADE format (*.CFG, *.HDR,
*.DAT).
Filenames in a set use the following format,
<AAA>_<ComtradeName>_<Date and Time>
<AAA> Is the decimal address of the device, always three digits.
<ComtradeName> Is the name specified by the ComtradeName section entry in the INI file.
<Date and Time> Is the date and time of the extraction in the following format,
YYYY-MM-DD--HH-MM-SS
where (HH) use the 24 hour clock.
Lists of filenames are sorted into chronological order for each device address.

21.5 LOG FILE


All errors are output to a log file. Some errors may create more than one error in the log file. The log file name is
user settable. See the LogFileName entry in the INI file.

21.6 USING THE SCHEDULED TASKS PROGRAM


1. Select Start then Settings then Control Panel.
2. Double-click Scheduled Tasks. The Scheduled Tasks program starts. The Task Scheduler varies from each
version of Windows so check Windows help to learn how to use this tool.

156 P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6
S1 Agile Settings Application Software

3. Double click Add Scheduled Task. The Scheduled Tasks Wizard starts. This lets you schedule the program to
run at regular intervals from once a day to once a year (inclusive). Once the task has been created, it can be
scheduled more frequently than once a day.
4. Double-click AEDR2, the Properties dialog appears.
5. Select Schedule then Advanced to configure it to run at intervals which can be as small as one minute.

Note:
The Scheduled Tasks facility can also be run directly from the WinAEDR2 application.

The Scheduled Tasks program is a component that is included with Windows®. It allows programs to be run
automatically at predetermined times. Other programs are available from independent companies that provide
more comprehensive facilities and these can be used as alternatives to run AEDR2.

P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6 157
Settings Application Software S1 Agile

22 WINAEDR2
WinAEDR2 is a management facility for AEDR2. It shows the history of all previous extractions and has shortcut
buttons to launch WaveWin, Windows Explorer and the Scheduled Task facility. It can also be used to view log files,
and edit and test the initialisation file.

22.1 FUNCTIONS
The main window lists the most recently extracted records in the order of extraction. There are also buttons to
launch the following functions.
WaveWin launches the WaveWin COMTRADE viewer application
ExtractionLog launches notepad to view the extraction log
ErrorLog launches notepad to view the error log
Explorer launches Windows Explorer
Scheduler launches the "Scheduled Tasks" application
Edit .INI File launches notepad to edit INI file
Test .INI File tests the INI file for errors and logs any errors
Run AEDR2 launches the AEDR2.exe application
AEDR2 Status shows the run status of AEDR2

158 P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6
S1 Agile Settings Application Software

23 WAVEWIN
Wavewin is used for viewing and analysing waveforms from disturbance records. It can be used to determine the
sequence of events that led to a fault.
Wavewin provides the following functions.
● File management
● Query management
● Log management
● Report generation
● Sequence of Events(SOE)
● Conversion of COMTRADE files
● Waveform summary

23.1 FILE MANAGER FEATURES


The File Manager is used to manage files, search the contents of a drive or directory, and edit, plot or draw the
contents of a file. This feature is similar to Windows Explorer with application-specific functions tailored for the
Power Utility industry.
The functions include automatic event file association, specialized copy or move, intelligent queries, report files,
COMTRADE conversion and compression routines, merge and append waveform and load files, event summaries
and calibration reports.
The File Manager supports the IEEE long file naming format.

23.2 SAVE AS COMTRADE


Oscillography formats supported by the software can be converted to the COMTRADE ASCII or Binary format. Two
Comtrade versions are supported: the older 1991 format and the newer 1999 format. The Comtrade format can
be selected from the Data Plotting Window’s Properties dialog. The default format is the newer 1999 format.
To create a COMTRADE file,
1. Place the cursor on the event file or mark the desired files
2. Select Options then Save As COMTRADE (ASCII or Binary).
3. Enter the destination path and filename (do not enter a filename extension).
4. Click OK. The .DAT and .CFG files are created automatically. If a path is not defined, the COMTRADE files are
saved in the active directory.
If the sample values in the selected file(s) are RMS calibrated and the desired COMTRADE file must have
instantaneous values, set the Comtrade Settings fields to automatically convert the RMS data to instantaneous
values.
To set the Comtrade Settings fields,
1. In the Analysis display, open the Window Properties dialog.
2. Select the Comtrade tab.
3. In the Convert RMS Calibrated Data to Peak Data dropdown box, select Yes.
To automatically convert the selected file(s) to COMTRADE using the IEEE long filename format,
1. In the Save As Comtrade dialog, check the Use the ComNames Naming Convention to Name the
Comtrade File(s) field
2. Leave the File Name field empty.
3. Click OK.

P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6 159
Settings Application Software S1 Agile

All files marked in the table are converted to the selected COMTRADE format and are named using the IEEE long
file naming convention.

160 P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6
S1 Agile Settings Application Software

24 DEVICE (MENU) TEXT EDITOR


The Menu Text Editor enables you to modify and replace the menu texts held in MiCOM Px4x IEDs. For example,
you may want to customise an IED so that menus appear in a language other than one of the standard languages.
By loading a copy of the current menu text file in one of the standard languages into the reference column, you
can type the appropriate translation of each menu entry into the target column.
This can then be sent from the PC to the IED, replacing one of the current standard languages. New menu text files
created this way can also be saved to disk for later use or further editing.

24.1 OPEN A CONNECTION


1. Select Device then Open Connection. The Open Connection dialog appears.
2. Select the port to which the device is connected.
3. Select the Device Timeout in minutes.
4. Click OK. The Password dialog is displayed.
5. Type the Password. This is displayed as asterisks.
6. Click OK. A message appears confirming the connection has been opened.

24.2 CHANGE CONNECTION PASSWORD


1. Open a connection with the device.
2. Select Device then Change Password. The Change Password dialog appears.
3. In the New Password box, enter the new password. This is displayed as asterisks.
4. In the Verify New Password box, enter the password again.
5. Click OK to accept.

24.3 OPEN A MENU TEXT FILE AS A REFERENCE


1. Select the Reference column.
2. Select File then Open. The Open File dialog appears.
3. Select the required menu text file then click the Open button.
4. The menu text file appears in the Reference column.

24.4 EDIT TEXT FILE OF DEVICE


1. Select File then New to create a default menu text file for the required device or select File then Open to
open an existing file.
2. The menu text file appears in the Target column. Select the required text cell in the Target tab
corresponding to the text in the Reference tab. Edit the file as required.
3. Select File then Save As.
4. Edit the File Name or Header fields as required.
5. Click Save.

24.5 SEND EDITED TEXT FILE TO DEVICE


1. Connect a PC to the required device.
2. Select Device then Open Connection to open a connection to the required device.

P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6 161
Settings Application Software S1 Agile

3. Select Send To Device.


4. Click OK.
5. Once the sending of the text file is complete, the new text appears in the menu on the IED screen.

162 P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6
S1 Agile Settings Application Software

25 SETTINGS EXCEL EXPORT


System Explorer allows you to import or export Excel files of settings in various formats.
The Settings File Import/Export Mapping tile allows you to create custom mapping files. These xml files map each
setting to an Excel cell.

25.1 MAPPING FILES


The mapping file is an xml file which maps each setting to an Excel cell.

25.1.1 EXPORT DEFAULT MAPPING


This xml file maps each setting to an Excel cell.
1. In System Explorer, under Device, right-click the Settings file.
2. Select Export then Export Default Excel Mapping.
3. Enter a filename for the output Excel mapping file, browse where to save it and click Save.
4. Click Close.

25.1.2 CREATE CUSTOM MAPPING


This xml file maps each setting to an Excel cell.
1. Click the Settings File Import/Export Mapping tile.
2. Select the File tab then click Open.
3. Select the required settings file and click Open.
4. Select the Home tab.
5. Edit the Excel Mapping column as required. This contains values from the mapping file.

25.1.3 CREATE CUSTOM MAPPING FROM DEFAULT MAPPING


This xml file maps each setting to an Excel cell.
1. In System Explorer, under Device, right-click the Settings file.
2. Select Export then Export Default Excel Mapping.
3. Enter a filename for the output Excel mapping file, browse where to save it and click Save.
4. Click Close.
5. Click the Settings File Import/Export Mapping tile.
6. Select the File tab then click Open.
7. Select the required settings file and click Open.
8. Click Load, select the mapping file you want to load, then click Open.
9. Edit the Excel Mapping column as required. This contains values from the mapping file.
10. Click Save.

25.1.4 HIDE OR SHOW MAPPED SETTINGS


1. Click the Settings File Import/Export Mapping tile.
2. Select the File tab then click Open.
3. Select the required settings file and click Open.
4. In the ribbon, check or uncheck the Show Mapped or Hide Mapped filters.

P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6 163
Settings Application Software S1 Agile

25.2 EXPORTING AN EXCEL FILE


The structure of the settings file is defined by the template. Some of the settings are global, which apply to all
devices, and some are local, which are device-specific. If you need to make individual changes to a settings file
that is controlled by templates, you can export the settings to an Excel file.
You can then edit values in the Excel file, keeping the same structure. This is important because each cell is
controlled by a mapping file. This is an xml file which maps each Excel cell to a cell in the settings file. Once you
have made the changes you can then reimport the Excel file.
If you include a custom mapping file:
1. In System Explorer, under Device, right-click the Settings file.
2. Select Export then Export to Excel.
3. Browse for the mapping file. This xml file maps each setting to an Excel cell.
4. Enter a filename for the output Excel file, browse where to save it and click Save.
5. Click Close. All editable settings are exported to Excel.
If you include the default mapping file:
1. In System Explorer, under Device, right-click the Settings file.
2. Select Export then Quick Export to Excel.
3. Enter a filename for the output Excel file, browse where to save it and click Save.
4. Click Close. All editable settings are exported to Excel.

25.2.1 EXPORT TO XRIO


When testing an IED, you can enter the IED settings into the test equipment software manually. The Settings
Application Software can output an XRIO file which allows you to import the settings into the test equipment
software. This can significantly reduce the time required to commission IEDs.
To export an XRIO file:
1. In System Explorer, under Device, right-click the Settings file.
2. Select Export then Export to XRIO.
3. Enter a filename for the output XRIO file, browse where to save it and click Save.
4. Click Close.

25.2.2 ABOUT XRIO


RIO is a standard data format for different manufacturers to exchange protection devices settings. It is a plain text
file with a common structure which allows devices to be tested with similar procedures. It defines the device and
its characteristics, then it can define the settings to test a particular protection function.
XRIO is an extension of RIO and models physical test objects in the Omicron Test Universe (OTU) 2.0 protection
environment. A test object can be a measurement or protection device. XRIO is based on XML and uses the basic
structure of a RIO plain text file but with additions.
Where RIO allows you to test one protection function with each file, XRIO allows you to test several protection
functions with each file. It also allows you to define custom settings which are specific to that device rather than
generic settings. Also, whereas RIO limits you to using the test object once, XRIO allows you to repeat the test
object several times.
A converter is used to convert the settings of the protection device into RIO format. However, XRIO files can have
the converter built in. These converters are specific to individual protection devices from each manufacturer but
are dependent on the Omicron Test Universe. The converter converts the device-specific settings to the Omicron
Test Object parameters.
XRIO uses a hierarchical tree structure with the following three sections.

164 P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6
S1 Agile Settings Application Software

Script Function section. You can declare global functions used to transform the device-specific settings into RIO
parameters.
Custom section. This can be freely defined. It maps the device-specific settings which you use to configure the test
object, You can also use formulae. This is the section that is exported by the Settings Application Sofware.
RIO section. This holds conventional RIO blocks for test modules intended for a specific protection function. These
are used by the test modules in the OTU. The structure is based on the RIO specification.

25.2.3 EXPORT TO CSV


To export a CSV file:
1. In System Explorer, under Device, right-click the Settings file.
2. Select Export then Export to CSV or CAPE.
3. Check the CSV checkbox and select any required options, then click OK.
4. Enter a filename for the output file, browse where to save it and click Save.
5. Click Close.

25.2.4 EXPORT TO CAPE


To export a CAPE file:
1. In System Explorer, under Device, right-click the Settings file.
2. Select Export then Export to CSV or CAPE.
3. Check the CAPE checkbox and select any required options, then click OK.
4. Enter a filename for the output file, browse where to save it and click Save.
5. Click Close.

25.3 IMPORTING AN EXCEL FILE


If you include a custom mapping file:
1. In System Explorer, under Device, right-click the Settings file.
2. Select Import then Import from Excel.
3. Browse for the mapping file. This xml file maps each setting to an Excel cell.
4. Browse for the input Excel file and click Save.
5. Click Close.
If you include the default mapping file:
1. In System Explorer, under Device, right-click the Settings file.
2. Select Import then Quick Import from Excel.
3. Browse for the input Excel file and click Save.
4. Click Close.

25.4 HIDE OR SHOW READ ONLY SETTINGS


1. Click the Settings File Import/Export Mapping tile.
2. Select the File tab then click Open.
3. Select the required settings file and click Open.
4. In the ribbon, check or uncheck the Show Read Only or Hide Read Only filters.

P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6 165
Settings Application Software S1 Agile

25.5 SELECT LANGUAGE


1. Click the Settings File Import/Export Mapping tile.
2. Select the File tab then click Options.
3. Select the language from the drop-down list.

166 P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6
S1 Agile Settings Application Software

26 P747 BUSBAR COMMISSIONING TOOL (REMOTE HMI)


This tool is intended for busbar commissioning. It allows you to create a scheme and display the measured data. It
consists of a scheme editor and a monitor that shows protection data in real time. The scheme editor allows you to
quickly draw schemes from a library of elements, then validate the scheme. The monitor continually updates
information about the scheme and shows the status of DDBs and values of measured data.

26.1 SCHEME EDITOR


The Scheme Editor allows you to quickly draw schemes from a library of elements, then validate the scheme.
To select your language, select File then Options then Language.
To create, open, save or print a scheme, select the File tab.

26.1.1 CONNECTIONS
To enable connection bridges:
1. Select File then Options then Diagram Settings.
2. Check Enable Connection Bridges.
The following table shows which elements can be connected together.
Feeder Isolator Current Voltage Busbar Isolator
Element Busbar Circuit Breaker
(Q) Transformer Transformer (Qbus)
Busbar can be
connected to max
Busbar No Always No No 1 VT element. Always
VT has only one
end connected
CB can be CT can be
VT has only one
Feeder Isolator (Q) Always No connected to 1 to connected to 1 to 2 No
end connected
4 isolators isolators
CB can be
Always.
Circuit Breaker No connected to 1 to No No No
Max 1 CB to 1 CT
4 isolators
CT can be
Current Always.
No connected to 1 to No No No
Transformer Max 1 CB to 1 CT
2 isolators
Busbar can be
connected to max
Voltage VT has only one
1 VT element. No No No No
Transformer end connected
VT has only one
end connected
Busbar Isolator
Always No No No No No
(Qbus)

26.1.1.1 MANUAL CONNECTIONS


To connect two elements:
1. Select File then Options then Diagram Settings.
2. Uncheck Enable Auto Connections.
3. Drag and drop two objects onto a scheme.
4. Drag a connection to each element. A green border shows the connection is complete.

P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6 167
Settings Application Software S1 Agile

26.1.1.2 AUTOMATIC CONNECTIONS


To connect two elements:
1. Select File then Options then Diagram Settings.
2. Check Enable Auto Connections.
3. Drag and drop two objects next to each other onto a scheme. The connection is made automatically.

26.1.1.3 REMOVE CONNECTION


To remove a connection:
1. Select a connection.
2. Pess the Delete key or click the Remove icon.

26.1.2 SCHEME ELEMENTS


The following table shows the number of elements allowed in a scheme.
Element Minimum number Maximum number
Busbar 1 4
Isolator 2 74
Circuit Breaker 2 18
Current Transformer 2 18
Voltage Transformer 0 4

26.1.2.1 ADD ELEMENTS TO A SCHEME


To add elements to a scheme, drag and drop them from the toolbox.

26.1.2.2 REMOVE AN ELEMENT


To remove an element from a scheme:
1. Select an element.
2. Pess the Delete key or click the Remove icon.

26.1.2.3 GROUP ELEMENTS IN A SCHEME


To group elements in a scheme:
1. Drag and drop the elements into the scheme.
2. Add any connections between them.
3. Select the elements you want to group.
4. Click the Group icon.

26.1.2.4 ROTATE ELEMENTS IN A GROUP


To rotate an element or group, select the item and click the Rotate Left or Rotate Right icon.

26.1.3 WORKING WITH TEXT ON THE SCHEME


You can add labels or free text onto the scheme:
● Circuit Breakers can be labelled CB1 to CB18.
● Current Transformers can be labelled CT1 to CT18.

168 P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6
S1 Agile Settings Application Software

● Voltage Transformers can be labelled VT1 to VT4.


● Feeder Isolators can be labelled QxZy where x=1 to 18 and y=1 to 4.
● Busbar Isolators can be labelled QBus1 to Qbus2.

26.1.3.1 ADD A LABEL TO AN ELEMENT


To add a label to an element:
1. Double-click the element and select a label from the drop-down list.
If many labels are available it can sometimes be difficult to find a specific one from the drop-down list. A
search function helps you to find the one you need.
2. Double-click the element.
3. Enter the seach text in the box at the top of the drop-down list.

26.1.3.2 REMOVE A LABEL FROM AN ELEMENT


To remove a label from an element, right-click the element and select Remove Label.

26.1.3.3 CHANGE AN ELEMENT'S LABEL


To change the label of an element, right-click the element and select Edit Label.

26.1.3.4 ADD OR REMOVE FREE TEXT


To add or remove free text, drag and drop the Free Text object onto the scheme and enter the text.
To edit the text, double click it.
To remove the text block, right-click it and select Remove.

26.1.3.5 VALIDATE A SCHEME


This checks for potential errors in the scheme and makes suggestions of how to correct them.
To validate scheme elements and the connections between them, click the Validate icon. To display the latest
validation results, click the Validation Report icon.

26.2 PROTECTION DATA MONITOR


The Protection Data Monitor shows the status of DDBs and measured data in the scheme.
To start the Protection Data Monitor:
1. Select File then Save or Save As to save the scheme.
2. Click the icon Switch to Dynamic Synoptic Mode.

26.2.1 CONNECT TO THE IED


To read the IED data, first set up the connection:
1. Click the Connect to P747 icon.
2. Select Single Device or Many Devices.
3. From the drop-down list select Front Serial Port, Rear Serial Port or Ethernet.
The table is populated with default values. Check they are suitable for your application. You can set the
Device Address from 1 to 255.
4. Click the Connect button. The connection status appears in the bottom left-hand corner of the screen.
Green shows the IED is connected.

P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6 169
Settings Application Software S1 Agile

26.2.1.1 POLLING TIMER


The Protection Data Monitor polls the IED and updates the states of the elements in the scheme. The Polling Timer
sets the time in seconds between each update.
To set the polling timer:
1. Click the Polling Timer icon.
2. Select the polling time in seconds from the drop-down list and click OK.
To stop or restart polling, click the Stop Polling icon or Resume Polling icon.

26.2.1.2 READ IED DATA


To read the IED data, click the Get Device Data icon.
This shows the Device Address, Model Number, Serial Number and device Description for each device that is
connected.

26.2.1.3 MEASUREMENTS DATA


The Measurements Panel is on the left-hand side of the screen. The top left-hand corner shows the measurements
for each zone and for each phase. The bottom left-hand corner shows the protection data and any alarms. The
phase angle and magnitude are shown at each CT on the scheme.

170 P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6
S1 Agile Settings Application Software

27 DYNAMIC SYNOPTIC
This tool allows you to monitor the substation electrical components and analogue values in real time.
This is the user manual for the topology configurator, which is used by the P740 numerical busbar protection.
The main window is composed of three parts:
● The internal windows for the scheme, the logical and analogue values.
● The menu bar
● A toolbar

27.1 SYNOPTIC MAIN WINDOW


This window is used to display the topology of the substation. The scheme is updated periodically with information
that is available in the connected device.

27.2 SYNOPTIC MAIN WINDOW

Feeder
Symbol Function Explanation

Feeder Feeder with PU Not Connected

Feeder Feeder with PU Connected

Current Transformer

Symbol Function Explanation

Current Transformer CT with PU Not Connected

Current Transformer CT Healthy

P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6 171
Settings Application Software S1 Agile

Symbol Function Explanation

Current Transformer CT with PU Not Connected

Circuit Breaker CB with PU Not Connected

Circuit Breaker CB Closed

Circuit Breaker CB Open

Circuit Breaker CB Open and Unavailable

Circuit Breaker CB Closed and Unavailable

Circuit Breaker CB Status Alarm

172 P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6
S1 Agile Settings Application Software

Circuit Breaker

Symbol Function Explanation

Circuit Breaker CB with PU Not Connected

Circuit Breaker CB Closed

Circuit Breaker CB Open

Circuit Breaker CB Open and Unavailable

Circuit Breaker CB Closed and Unavailable

Circuit Breaker CB Status Alarm

The CB is unavailable when the logic input "CB Not Available" is active. When the PU is in Commissioning mode
"50BF disabled", the CB is unavailable too.

P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6 173
Settings Application Software S1 Agile

Symbol Function Explanation

Isolator with PU Not Connected

Isolator when Qx is Closed

Isolator when Qx is Opened

Isolator when Qx is Status Alarm

If the DDB signal Qx status alarm is not used in the PSL, the isolator can be opened or closed but never in alarm.

27.3 MENU
The menu is composed of 5 sub-menus:
● File
● Device
● Tools
● View
● Help

27.3.1 FILE
The File menu contains the following actions:
● Open: To open a dynamic synoptic file .dyn. No action except exit is available before the opening of a
scheme.
● Close: To close the dynamic synoptic file
● Exit: To close the application

174 P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6
S1 Agile Settings Application Software

27.3.2 DEVICE
The File menu contains the following actions:
● Communications Setup: To configure the communication.
● Open Connection to PU: For a front port connection to a PU
● Open Connection to CU: For a front port connection to the CU
● Open Connection to System: For a rear port connection to the CU and/or PU

27.3.2.1 COMMUNICATIONS SETUP


This dialog is used to set the communications connection details and save them in the communication setup:
● COM Port: Select the port to which the relevant device is connected.
● Baud Rate: Select the baud rate used.

27.3.2.2 OPEN CONNECTIONS TO PU


Open Connection to PU opens a dialog box for the address of the PU.
Enter the address of the PU then confirm with OK to open the communication. If the communications are opened
successfully, the refresh starts automatically.

27.3.2.3 OPEN CONNECTIONS TO CU


Open Connection to CU opens the communication with the central unit address 6. If the communications are
opened successfully, the refresh starts automatically.

27.3.2.4 OPEN CONNECTIONS TO SYSTEM


Open Connection to CU opens the communication with the central unit address 6. If the communications are
opened successfully, the refresh starts automatically.

27.4 TOOLS
The Tools menu contains the following actions:
● Polling Timer: To change the refresh period of all data. If the processing time is longer than the refresh
period, then the process restarts immediately.
● Start/Stop Polling: To start or stop polling.
● Zoom: To reset the zoom magnification, or to increase or decrease it.

27.5 VIEW
The View Menu allows you to see the measured values of the units in the system. This is only possible after
connecting.
● Analogue Values of PU
● Analogue Values of CU
● Logic Values of PU
● Logic Values of CU
● Device Data

P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6 175
Settings Application Software S1 Agile

27.5.1 DEVICE DATA


Information about the equipment connected is available in this window. This includes:
● Description and plant reference, which is set in the settings
● Model and serial number
● Software version

27.5.2 LOGIC VALUES OF THE CU

The window for Logic values of CU is divided into five parts:


1. Monitor bit: The value displayed is identical to the Test Port Status cell in the COMMISSIONING TESTS
column.
2. Trip and Trip Zone: The first line indicates the protection which is operated: 87BB, 50BF or manual tripping.
The symbol turns red when the trip occurs. The second line indicates the tripping zone. Both trip signals,
zone and protection, are maintained for five seconds.
3. Alarm: The default status of the LED is grey. When there is an alarm on the PU, the LED turns yellow and the
list of alarms is available in the Combo box on the right.
4. Protection Status: The first line indicates which of the protections are locked:
● 87BB: When there is a blocking for a circuitry fault or a PU error or when the mode Lck Level 1 or Lck Level 2
is active
● 50BF: When the mode Lck Level 2 is active
● P740: When the mode All Prot Disabled is selected in the CU

The second line indicates the zone.


1. PU connected: The address of the PUs connected to the CU are displayed in this field

27.5.3 LOGIC VALUES OF THE PU


The window for Logic values of PU is divided into four parts:
1. Monitor bit: The value displayed is identical to the Test Port Status cell in the COMMISSIONING TESTS
column.
2. Trip: The default status of the LED is grey. When a trip occurs on the PU, the LED turns red. There is a five
second drop-off on the Any trip DDB signal to display this information.
3. Alarm: The default status of the LED is grey. When there is an alarm on the PU, the LED is turns yellow and
the list of alarms is available in the Combo box on the right.
4. Protection Status: This line indicates if the PU is in service (Green = ON) or if a commissioning mode is active
(Red = OFF)
● 50BF: In red when the mode 50BF Disabled is selected in the PU
● PU: In red when the mode Out of Service is selected in the PU
● P740: In red when the mode All Prot Disabled is selected in the CU

27.5.4 CU ANALOGUE VALUES


From the CU, the differential and bias currents for the Check Zone (CZ) and all the zones (Z1 to Zx) are available.
From the PU, only the currents of the connected zone are available.
The display in primary or secondary value depends on the setting in the Measurement Setup column.

176 P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6
S1 Agile Settings Application Software

27.5.5 PU ANALOGUE VALUES


This window displays the magnitude of the currents in the PU.

27.6 HELP
Contains the Help section and the About section.

P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6 177
Settings Application Software S1 Agile

28 REMOTE HMI
The MiCOM P746 Remote HMI is an application that is used to define and create schemes as well as display the
measured data. This application operates in two modes:
● Scheme Editor: This mode allows the user to define a scheme with the predefined Busbars, Tie Groups and
Feeder Groups.
● Dynamic Synoptic: This tool is used to display the measured analogue quantities and DDB (Digital Data Bus)
status information based on the scheme designed in Scheme Editor mode.

28.1 COMMUNICATION SETTINGS


The Remote HMI application can communicate with the device through SERIAL COM port and ETHERNET
TUNNELING.
You can select the settings before starting to communicate with the device in the Scheme Editor or Dynamic
Synoptic mode. The selected communication option and their settings are displayed in the left-hand side of the
Status Bar.

28.1.1 SERIAL SETTINGS


The following settings can be set for SERIAL communication with P746:
COM port: The list of COM ports available in the system will be displayed. Select the port to which P746 is
connected.
Baud Rate: Select the Baud Rate to be used. The options are 19200 and 9600.
BusyHoldoff: The time interval used by Courier between receiving a BUSY response and sending a subsequent
POLL BUFFER command. It only affects RS485 daisy chains used in rear port connections
Permissible values: 0 to 65535
Default value: 50
BusyCount: The maximum number of BUSY responses that will be accepted for a single Courier transaction before
aborting the transaction. To cope with abnormal situations where a device is not replying correctly to requests, a
limit is placed on the number of BUSY responses that should be accepted. Without this limit the link to the device
would be stuck in a loop. It only affects RS485 daisy chains used in rear port connections.
Permissible values: 0 to 65535
Default value: 100
ResetResponse: The maximum time from sending the last byte of a Courier Reset Remote Link message to
receiving the first byte of a response. When that time has elapsed, the request is aborted. The recommended value
for all connections is 1000ms.
Permissible values: 0 to 65535
Default value: 100
Response: The maximum time from a sending the last byte of a Courier message to receiving the first byte of a
response. When that time has elapsed the request is aborted. The Response Time parameter is used for all
messages except Courier Reset Remote Link messages.
Permissible values: 0 to 65535
Default value: 100
TryCount: The number of tries before aborting the request.
Permissible values: 0 to 65535
Default value: 3

178 P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6
S1 Agile Settings Application Software

TransmitDelay: The minimum delay that is put between receiving a response and transmitting the next request.
Transmit delay is normally set to zero but can be set to a few milliseconds when using half duplex communication.
This gives the other end of the link time to change from transmitting to receiving.
Permissible values: 0 to 65535
Default value: 5
GlobalTransmit: The minimum delay that is put between transmitting a global message and the next
transmission.
Parameter type: Integer
Permissible values: 0 to 65535
Default value: 10

28.1.2 ETHERNET SETTINGS


The following settings can be set for "ETHERNET" communication:
IP Address (Mandatory): Set the IP address though which P746 can be connected.
TCP Port number (Optional): Select this option if specific ETHERNET TCP port has to be used. If this option is not
selected, default ETHERNET port 0 will be used.
Bay Address (Optional): Select this option if P746 is connected though a Bay Unit and set the Bay Unit's address.
BusyHoldoff: The time interval used by Courier between receiving a BUSY response and sending a subsequent
POLL BUFFER command. It does not affect Ethernet connections
Permissible values: 0 to 65535
Default value: 0
BusyCount: The maximum number of BUSY responses that will be accepted for a single Courier transaction before
aborting the transaction. To cope with abnormal situations where a device is not replying correctly to requests, a
limit is placed on the number of BUSY responses that should be accepted. Without this limit the link to the device
would be stuck in a loop. It does not affect Ethernet connections.
Permissible values: 0 to 65535
Default value: 0
ResetResponse: The maximum time from sending the last byte of a Courier Reset Remote Link message to
receiving the first byte of a response. When that time has elapsed, the request is aborted. The recommended value
for all connections is 1000ms.
Permissible values: 0 to 65535
Default value: 100
Response: The maximum time from a sending the last byte of a Courier message to receiving the first byte of a
response. When that time has elapsed the request is aborted. The Response Time parameter is used for all
messages except Courier Reset Remote Link messages.
Permissible values: 0 to 65535
Default value: 5000
TryCount: The number of tries before aborting the request.
Permissible values: 0 to 65535
Default value: 3
TransmitDelay: The minimum delay that is put between receiving a response and transmitting the next request.
Transmit delay is normally set to zero but can be set to a few milliseconds when using half duplex communication.
This gives the other end of the link time to change from transmitting to receiving.

P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6 179
Settings Application Software S1 Agile

Permissible values: 0 to 65535


Default value: 0
GlobalTransmit: The minimum delay that is put between transmitting a global message and the next
transmission.
Parameter type: Integer
Permissible values: 0 to 65535
Default value: 15

28.2 SCHEME EDITOR


The Scheme Editor window is used to design the scheme for the device using the Busbar, Feeder Group and Tie
Group graphical icons.
The Main Window is composed of following parts:
● The Menu Bar
● A Toolbar
● Toolbox
● Scheme Design Window

28.2.1 PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION


A library of predefined symbols allows the scheme to be created. This library is located in the form of toolbox
located in the left side of the main window. These symbols can be easily dragged and dropped into the Scheme
Window.
Symbol Description

Busbar

Busbar Link

Tie Group 1

Tie Group 2

Tie Group 3

Tie Group 4

Tie Group 5

180 P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6
S1 Agile Settings Application Software

Symbol Description

Tie Group 6

Feeder Group 1

Feeder Group 2

Feeder Group 3

Feeder Group 4

P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6 181
Settings Application Software S1 Agile

Symbol Description

Feeder Group 5

Feeder Group 6

Feeder Group 7

Feeder Group 8

182 P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6
S1 Agile Settings Application Software

Symbol Description

Feeder Group 9

Feeder Group 10

Feeder Group 11

Feeder Group 12

P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6 183
Settings Application Software S1 Agile

Symbol Description

Feeder Group 13

Feeder Group 14

Feeder Group 15

Feeder Group 16

184 P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6
S1 Agile Settings Application Software

28.2.2 CONSTRAINTS
There are a number of constraints to consider:
● The maximum number of Busbars that can be created in the scheme is restricted to two. Only one Tie Group
can be created in the scheme.
● The initial drag and drop placement of an object onto the scheme editor page is not possible if the ‘grey
boundary box’ of such an object is touching or overlapping with another object already placed on the page.
● Feeder Group cannot be created before creating at least one busbar in the scheme.
● The Feeder group and Tie group components can not be resized.
● The number of Feeder groups that can be created is restricted to six in 1 box mode and 18 in 3 box mode.
● If vertical Busbar links are used within a scheme then they must be applied to both Busbar ends. for
example, zone 1 and zone 2.
● Objects that are placed within a scheme must be positioned with sufficient space to allow measurements to
be displayed when in the Dynamic Synoptic mode.

28.3 SCHEME DESIGN

28.3.1 CREATING A NEW SCHEME


To create a new scheme go to Select File > New menu or New icon in the toolbar. The Select Scheme Mode
window is displayed
1. If the device is connected, select the Relay Connected option and then press the OK button. The P746 mode
is retrieved from the unit and a new scheme is created.
2. If the device is not connected, select the Relay Not connected option, One Box Mode or 3 Box Mode and
then press the OK button to create a new scheme.
In both cases the newly created scheme is displayed.

28.3.2 CREATING A BUSBAR


The only difference between Busbar Left and Busbar Right is that the Busbar Labels on these symbols is displayed
on left side and right side respectively. To create a Busbar, drag and drop the Busbar Left or Busbar Right symbol
from Busbar Toolbox into the Scheme Window. The Set Busbar Properties window is displayed.
Select either the BB1 or BB2 option and then press the OK button to create the Busbar. To increase the length of
the Busbar, click on the endpoint and drag the mouse.

28.3.3 CREATING A BUSBAR LINK


To create a Busbar link, drag and drop the Busbar Link symbol from the Busbar Toolbox into the Scheme Window.

Note:
Only two Busbar Links are allowed in a scheme.

P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6 185
Settings Application Software S1 Agile

28.3.4 CREATING A TIE GROUP


To create a Tie Group, drag and drop the Tie Group symbol from Tie Group Toolbox into the Scheme Window.
1. If the selected Tie Group does not have a CT, it will be created immediately.
2. If the selected Tie Group has one CT, the Tie Group Properties window will be displayed with one CT.
3. If the selected Tie Group has two CTs, the Tie Group Properties window will be displayed with two CTs.
4. Select CT for CT1 and CT2 and press the APPLY button to create the Tie Group.

Note:
Only one Tie Group is allowed in a scheme. The same CTs are not allowed for CT1 and CT2 for Tie Groups with double CTs.

28.3.5 CREATING A FEEDER GROUP


To create a Feeder Group, drag and drop the Feeder Group symbol from the Feeder Group Toolbox into the
Scheme Window. The Feeder Group Properties window is displayed.
1. Select Feeder and press the APPLY button to create the Feeder Group.
Only six 1 Box mode and 18 3 Box Feeder Groups can be created.

28.3.6 ASSOCIATION OF ZONES FOR ISOLATORS


The Zone information for isolators in Feeder Groups and Tie Groups is associated dynamically when they are
moved nearer to the Busbar.
The following diagram shows an example of association of Zone for Isolators in Feeder Groups.

Before After

BB2 BB2

Q2Z2

Q2
CB2

CB2

CT2

CT2

Feeder 2

Feeder 2

V01838

Figure 54: Association of Feeder Group with Single Isolator Group

186 P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6
S1 Agile Settings Application Software

The following diagram shows an example of association of Zone for Isolators in Tie Groups.

After
Before

BB1 BB2 BB1 BB2

QZ1 CB QZ2

Q CB Q

V01839

Figure 55: Association of Tie Group without Busbar Links

28.3.7 EDIT OPTIONS


To move an object: All objects can be moved anywhere in the scheme by following these steps:
1. Select the objects to be moved
2. Click the object using mouse and drag it to the new position
3. Use the UP, DOWN, LEFT and RIGHT arrow keys to move in any direction
4. If the new position of the object overlaps with any other object, the object won't move
To copy and paste an object:
1. Only one object can be copied at a time.
2. Select the object to be copied.
3. Copy the object by selecting Edit >Copy menu or right click the mouse on the selected object and choose
Copy Selection from the submenu that appears.
4. Select Edit >Paste menu or right click the mouse and choose Paste Selection from the submenu that
appears.
5. Left click the mouse on the point where the object is to be pasted.
6. If the new position of the object overlaps with any other object, the object will not be pasted and a "beep"
will sound.
To add new text:
1. Select the ‘Alphabet’ character from the tool bar menu and then select the location in the scheme for new
text to be placed. The Insert Text dialog box will then appear making it possible to insert the new text.
To modify text in the text object:
1. Select the text object whose text to be modified.
2. Right click the mouse on the selected text object and choose "Edit Text" option from the submenu that
appears.
3. "Insert Text" dialog box appears, making it possible to modify the text.
To remove an object:
1. Select a single object or multiple objects to be removed.
2. Press "Del" button or select "Edit->Clear" menu to remove the selected objects.
3. To remove all objects at a time, select "Edit->Clear All" menu.

P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6 187
Settings Application Software S1 Agile

To cancel last operation:


1. Press Ctrl + Z or select Edit > Undo menu to cancel the last operation.

28.4 DYNAMIC SYNOPTIC


The Dynamic Synoptic polls states of CBs (Circuit Breaker), CTs (Current Transformer) with their Primary ratios and
load currents, CB Bus Coupler and Isolators present in the scheme. The respective icons are animated based on
the states polled from P746 and the load currents are displayed near each CT. These values are updated
periodically with the information polled from the P746 unit connected it.
Dynamic Synoptic polls P746 relay and displays P746 Mode Configuration, differential and bias currents per phase,
neutral values of each zone and CZ (Check Zone), voltages for connected zone, DDB Status information for
Protection Status, Trip Status, Blocked Zone, Trip Zone and Alarm DDB Signals.
Zone Measurements:
● In 1 Box mode, Differential and Bias Currents per phase and neutral values of Zone1, Zone2 and Check Zone
are displayed.
● In 3 Box mode, Differential and Bias Currents for the Protected phase of Zone1, Zone2 and Check Zone are
displayed.
● The voltage values for connected zone are displayed.

Protection Status:
● This indicates the blocked state of 87BB and 50BF signals.
● The colours used are GREEN for "OK" and RED for "BLOCKED" state.

Trip Status:
● This indicates the trip state of 87BB and 50BF signals.
● The colours used are GREEN for "NO TRIP" and RED for "TRIPPED" state.

Blocked Zone:
● This indicates which zone is blocked.
● The colours used are GREEN for "OK" and RED for "BLOCKED" state.

Trip Zone:
● This indicates which zone is tripped.
● The colours used are GREEN for "NO TRIP" and RED for "TRIPPED" state.

Alarm Signals:
● The active alarms are displayed in the "ALARMS LIST BOX".
● On clicking the button next to the list box, the list of active alarms will be displayed.
● The ALARM icon will be in GREEN colour if no alarm is active. If at least 1 alarm is active, ALARM icon will be
displayed in RED in colour.

28.5 DYNAMIC SYNOPTIC

28.5.1 FILE
The FILE menu proposes the following actions:
● New: Click File -> New menu or Click New icon in the Toolbar to create a new Scheme in the Scheme Editor
mode. No actions except open and exit are available before creating a new scheme.
● Open: Click File -> Open menu or Click Open icon in the Toolbar to open the saved scheme. No actions
except new and exit are available before opening a scheme.

188 P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6
S1 Agile Settings Application Software

● Save: If the scheme is open the File -> Save menu or Save icon in the Toolbar saves the scheme
permanently.
● Save As…: If the scheme is open the File -> Save As… menu saves the scheme with different names.
● Close: If the scheme is open the File -> Close menu closes the it.
● Page Setup: If the scheme is open the File -> Page Setup menu, the Page Setup window opens. This allows
to setup the page settings for printing.
● Print: Select File->Print to display a dialog box that allows to select the printer.
● Print Preview: Select File->Print Preview to preview the scheme in Print Preview dialog box.

28.5.2 EDIT
The EDIT is enabled in the Scheme Editor mode. All submenus under this menu are disabled in Dynamic Synoptic
mode.
Undo: Select Edit -> Undo menu or Type “CTRL + Z” or Undo icon in the Toolbar to cancel the last action.
Redo: Select Edit -> Redo menu or Type “CTRL + Y” or Redo icon in the Toolbar to restore the undone action.
Cut: Select Edit > Cut menu or Cut icon in the Toolbar to cut the selected symbol in the scheme.
Copy: Select Edit > Copy menu or Copy icon in the Toolbar to copy the selected symbol in the scheme.
Paste: Select Edit > Paste menu or Paste icon in the toolbar to paste the cut or copied symbol in the scheme.
Select All: Select Edit > Select All menu or type CTRL + A to select all the symbols in the scheme.
Clear: Select Edit > Clear menu or press the Delete key to delete the selected symbol in the scheme.
Clear All: Select Edit > Clear All to delete the all the symbols in the scheme.

28.5.3 VIEW

Zoom In:
Click View > Zoom > Zoom In or “Zoom In” icon in the Toolbar to enlarge the scheme from 25% to 200%.

Zoom Out:
Click View > Zoom > Zoom Out menu or “Zoom Out” icon in the Toolbar to minimize the scheme from 200% to
25%.

Grid:
Click View > Grid menu to view and hide the grid in the scheme.

28.5.4 DEVICE
Communication Setup: Select Device > Communication Setup menu to display Communication Setup dialog box
to set the communication settings in Scheme Editor and Dynamic Synoptic mode.
Connect to P746: Select Device > Connect to P746 to connect to the relay through the selected communication
option. After connecting to the relay, the tool starts to poll the data, animates the scheme and displays the
measurement data received.
Get Device Data: This menu is enabled only when the data is being polled from P746. Select Device > Get Device
Data to display the device information in a dialog box.
Set Polling Timer: Select Device > Set Polling Timer menu to set the polling frequency using Set Polling Timer
dialog box.
Stop polling: This menu is enabled only when the data is being polled from P746. Select Device > Stop Polling
menu to stop polling in the Dynamic Synaptic mode.

P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6 189
Settings Application Software S1 Agile

28.5.5 MODE
The MODE menu contains only one sub-menu that differs in idle condition, Scheme Editor Mode and Dynamic
Synoptic Mode.
If there is no scheme present, the submenu will be disabled.
If Scheme Editor Mode is active, Switch to Dynamic Synoptic Mode will be displayed. Select this menu item to
switch from Scheme Editor mode to Dynamic Synaptic mode.
If Dynamic Synaptic Mode is active, Switch to Scheme Editor Mode will be displayed. Select this menu item to
switch from Dynamic Synaptic Mode to Scheme Editor mode.

28.5.6 LANGUAGE
To select the following languages:
● English: Select Language > English menu to choose English language.
● French: Select Language > Français menu to choose French language.
● Spanish: Select Language > Español menu to choose Spanish language.
● German: Select Language > Deutsch menu to choose German language.
● Russian: Select Language > Русский menu to choose Russian language.
● Chinese: Select Language > 简体中文 menu to choose Chinese language.

190 P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6
Imagination at work

Grid Solutions
St Leonards Building
Redhill Business Park
Stafford, ST16 1WT, UK
+44 (0) 1785 250 070
[email protected]

© 2023 General Electric. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or
should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial
circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without
express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

P40-MCR-SAS-UG-EN-6

You might also like